All in One Printer User Manual

ManualsBrandsToshiba ManualsAll in One PrinterMULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e-STUDIO4500c/5500c

SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c

File No. SME060023C0

R060621C2200-TTEC

Ver03_2007-04

Summary of content (1120 pages)

PAGE 1
SERVICE MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e-STUDIO4500c/5500c File No.
PAGE 2
TRADEMARKS • • • • • • • • • • The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
PAGE 3
1. CONVENTIONS Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses several symbols. Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed) Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed) Cautions, Notes, etc. The following headings provide special information: WARNING FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
PAGE 4
Commonly Used Terms In the SP tables, the finishers are referred to by number, and some devices that appear in the SP tables are not supported overseas: Finisher 1 Finisher 2 Z-Fold QL ITB PTR PCU IDU SBU NIB STC TD ADS M/A MUSIC DFU EM 3000/2000-Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The B700 supports corner stapling, booklet stapling and booklet folding. The B701 supports corner stapling only. 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. This refers to the Z-Folding unit. The copier does not support this peripheral device at this time.
PAGE 5
2. GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy for future reference. Safety Information Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. WARNING A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or serious injury.
PAGE 6
2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SERVICE ENGINEER 2.1.1 SERVICE ENGINEER Maintenance shall be done only by trained service engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. 2.1.
PAGE 7
2.2 BEFORE INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE 2.2.1 SHIPPING AND MOVING THE MACHINE CAUTION 1. Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or more service engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over. 2. Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper clothing and footwear.
PAGE 8
2.2.3 INSTALLATION, DISASSEMBLY, AND ADJUSTMENTS CAUTION 1. After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal operation. 2.
PAGE 9
2.3 DURING MAINTENANCE 2.3.1 GENERAL CAUTION 1. Before you begin a maintenance procedure: • Switch the machine off. • Disconnect the power plug from the power source. • Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes. 2. Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces. 3. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, heater and fuser unit areas around them. 4.
PAGE 10
2.3.3 ORGANIC CLEANERS CAUTION 1. During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other than those described in the service manual. 2. Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous. 3. Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive maintenance.
PAGE 11
2.3.6 POWER PLUG AND POWER CORD WARNING 1. Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems. 2. Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire. 3.
PAGE 12
2.4 AFTER INSTALLATION, SERVICING 2.4.1 DISPOSAL OF USED ITEMS WARNING Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges. Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal. CAUTION 1.
PAGE 13
2.4.2 POINTS TO CONFIRM WITH OPERATORS At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize the following points. • Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions. • Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove. • Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
PAGE 14
2.5 SPECIAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TONER This section describes information for users in regard to the use of toner. 2.6 ACCIDENTAL PHYSICAL EXPOSURE CAUTION 1. Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands. 2. If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention. 3.
PAGE 15
2.8 TONER DISPOSAL WARNING 1. Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns. 2. Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items. 3. Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
PAGE 16
2.8.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off. 4.
PAGE 17
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL 1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box.
PAGE 18
WARNING 1. Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting service. 2. Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places such as laser beam exit of the laser optical unit.
PAGE 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION ...........................................................................1-1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1 1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT .........................................................1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2 1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3 1.1.4 DIMENSIONS ................
PAGE 20
1.6.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-51 Removing Tape and Accessories........................................................1-51 LCT Adapter (B699) Installation..........................................................1-52 LCT Installation ...................................................................................1-53 LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 8 1/2” x 11” (LT) .............1-56 1.7 8 1/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) .
PAGE 21
1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) .................................................1-103 1.14.1 ACCESSORIES ..........................................................................1-102 1.14.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-104 Removing Tapes and Packing Materials...........................................1-104 Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) ........................................1-105 Attaching the Extensions for the B706 ...............
PAGE 22
2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701....................2-11 2.3.3 PUNCH B702..................................................................................2-11 2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706........................................................2-11 2.3.5 PUNCH B531..................................................................................2-11 2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 ...............................................2-12 2.3.7 LCT B473...........................................
PAGE 23
3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................3-34 3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR........................................................................3-35 3.4.3 LASER UNIT...................................................................................3-36 Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement ........................................3-39 3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR....................................3-40 3.5 PCU (POTO CONDUCTOR UNITS) ....................
PAGE 24
3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT..............................................................3-90 3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS ....................................................3-91 3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR..............................................................3-92 3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER ....3-93 3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER.........................3-94 3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS ..................
PAGE 25
3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD ...................................................................3-140 3.14.8 PSU ............................................................................................3-141 3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD .....................................................................3-142 3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS ........3-143 3.15 HDD UNIT............................................................................................3-144 Disposal of HDD Units .............
PAGE 26
3.19.2 ARDF ..........................................................................................3-179 ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration..............................3-179 3.19.3 REGISTRATION .........................................................................3-180 Image Area .......................................................................................3-180 Leading Edge....................................................................................3-180 Side to Side....
PAGE 27
4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS............................................................4-27 SC codes Group 1: Scanning..............................................................4-28 SC codes Group 2: Exposure .............................................................4-30 SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1 .......................................4-37 SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 .......................................4-42 SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed.......................................
PAGE 28
4.4.8 LOW PAWER MODE TEMPERATURE ..........................................4-92 SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-92 CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-92 ACTION: ............................................................................................4-92 4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER .............................................4-94 SYMPTOM: .........................
PAGE 29
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET................................................5-8 Software Reset .....................................................................................5-8 Resetting the User Tool Settings ..........................................................5-8 Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only .................................5-8 Resetting Scanner Features Only .........................................................5-8 5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING.............................
PAGE 30
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........................................5-212 5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-213 SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-213 SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-213 SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log.....................5-213 5.11 USER TOOLS......................................................................................5-214 5.11.
PAGE 31
6.5.5 DUST DETECTION ........................................................................6-36 Overview .............................................................................................6-36 What Happens if Dust is Detected? ....................................................6-37 How is the Dust Detected?..................................................................6-38 The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection...........................6-39 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ..................
PAGE 32
6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS..................................................6-72 6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS ........................6-73 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor...........................................................6-73 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor .................................................6-74 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor ..........................................................6-74 Waste Toner Bottle Lock Sensor ...............................................
PAGE 33
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray...............................6-115 Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection ..............................................6-116 Fence Drive.......................................................................................6-118 Rear Fence Drive ..............................................................................6-119 Tray Side-to-side Positioning ............................................................6-120 6.13.
PAGE 34
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS................................................. B331-4 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...........B331-4LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B473-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... B473-1 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... B473-2 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID.......................................................................... B473-3 1.
PAGE 35
1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ................... B700-22 1) 1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER............................................................. B700-22 2) 1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR .............................................. B700-23 1. 2. DETAILS........................................................................ B700-24 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B700-24 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ....................................
PAGE 36
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B704-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 EXTERNAL COVERS......................................................................... B704-1 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................. B704-2 FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B704-3 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... B704-4 MAIN BOARD .....
PAGE 37
3.5 SENSORS ........................................................................................ B706-11 3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ...... B706-11 Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2...................................................... B706-11 Exit Guide Open Sensor .............................................................. B706-11 3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR ................. B706-12 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor....................................................
PAGE 38
6.6 FEED-OUT ....................................................................................... B706-40 6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ................................................................. B706-41 6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................................................................................... B706-42 6.8.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. B706-42 Stand-by Mode.............................................................................
PAGE 39
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... SPEC-1 1. MAINFRAME .......................................................................................SPEC-1 1.1 COPYING ....................................................................................SPEC-1 Paper Sizes...................................................................................SPEC-3 1.2 PRINTING....................................................................................SPEC-4 1.
PAGE 40
August, 2006 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Installation 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 1. Temperature Range: Recommended Temp.: 23°C (73.4°) Allowed Temp.: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F) *1 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light.) 4. Ventilation: Air must be replaced a minimum of 3 times per hour 5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.
PAGE 41
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS August, 2006 6. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a location that agrees with these conditions: a) Where there are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or high to low. b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer. c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a heater in the winter 7.
PAGE 42
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Put the copier near the power source. Minimum clearance must be as shown below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed. 0 mm Rear 160 mm (6.3") Left 110 mm (4.3") Right 750 mm (29.5") Front B132I111.
PAGE 43
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS August, 2006 1.1.4 DIMENSIONS 480 mm (18.9") 480 mm (18.9") 1,198 mm (43.2") 1,230 mm (48.4") 1,014 mm (39.9") 90 mm (3.5") 657 mm (25.9") 750 mm (29.5") 354 mm (13.9") B132I112.WMF 850 mm (33.5") 613 mm (24.1") 458 mm (18") B132I113.
PAGE 44
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS WARNING! 1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and that you can get access to it easily. Make sure the plug is tightly connected to the outlet. 2. Do not connect more than one electrical device to the same power outlet. 3. Be sure to ground the machine. 4. Do not put objects on the power cord.
PAGE 45
COPIER AND PERIPHERALS August, 2006 1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS 11 10 15 2 9 13 8 5 7 14 12 6 4 1 17 3 16 B132I116.WMF This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier. No.
PAGE 46
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation 1.3 COPIER e-STUDIO4500c/5500c 1.3.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Instructions Pocket.............................................................. 1 2. Exposure glass cloth holder................................................ 1 3. Exposure glass cloth........................................................... 1 4. Leveling Shoes .......................................................
PAGE 47
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 1.3.2 INSTALLATION Note Tapes and packing material [B] [H] [C] [A] B132I910A.MWF [G] [D] B132I703.WMF [E] [F] B132I004.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do these procedures. Note Be sure to place slanted support [G] made of cardboard with its hard side [H] up when unloading the copier from the pallet using it.
PAGE 48
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation August, 2006 [A] [B] B132I002.
PAGE 49
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [C] [B] [A] [D] B132I005.WMF 1. Open the front door and, and remove the transfer belt release lever [A] (1 tape). We will install this in the correct location later. Important • DO NOT TOUCH [B], [C], OR [D] AT THIS TIME. THESE ITEMS ARE REMOVED AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FACE PLATE. • TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ITB, NEVER TURN DOWN LEVER [D] TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU HAVE REMOVED THE ROD WITH THE RED TAG AND WIRE [B].
PAGE 50
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation [A] [B] B132I102.WMF 2. From Tray 1 remove: [A]: Block, tape [B]: Retainer, tag, wire ( x1) 3. Remove all retainers and accessories from Trays 2, Tray 3.
PAGE 51
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Shipping Retainer Removal [A] [B] B132I006A.WMF [C] 1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the hopper. 2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper cover [A] ( x 3). 3. Put your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper, and slowly pull it out on its rails until it stops. 4. Push the lock [B] then pull down the support leg [C]. 5. Make sure that the support leg is down and locked.
PAGE 52
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation [B] [C] [A] B132I715.WMF [D] B132I902.WMFF 8. Remove the tag, and rod [A] ( x 1). 9. Disconnect the fan connector [B]. 10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x 5). 11. Put the PCU stand [D] on a flat, clean surface. 12. Use a clean cloth to remove dust from the surface of the stand.
PAGE 53
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [D] [F] [A] [E] [B] [C] B132I723.WMF Important: • DO NOT TRY TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FOLLOWING RETAINERS. 13. Remove the tape [A]. 14. Pull on the reinforced part [B] on tag [C] to remove the stabilizing rod [D]. NOTE: If you do not pull on the reinforced part [B], you will tear the tag or pull the wire off. 15. Remove the bracket [E], red tag, and wire ( x1). NOTE: Do not remove bracket [F].
PAGE 54
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation Developer Cartridge Installation [A] B132I903.WMF [B] R F [C] B132R214.WMF Important • The OPC drum is exposed on the bottom of the PCU. • Do not put your hand under the PCU when you hold the PCU. • Always use the PCU stand. Do not put the PCU on other surfaces. 1. Push down the tab [A] above the Yellow PCU. 2. Hold the Yellow PCU [B] by its sides, and pull it out of the machine. 3. Set the PCU on the PCU stand [C].
PAGE 55
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [D] [B] [A] [E] [C] B132R210.WMF 5. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] ( x 3). Important: After you remove the shaft cap, make sure that you do not turn the shaft [C] of the development roller. 6. On the rear end of the PCU, remove the lock plate [D] ( x 4). 7. Remove the development unit [E] from the PCU.
PAGE 56
August, 2006 [C] [F] Installation [B] COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C [B] [D] [A] [E] B132I105.WMF [G] B132I105A.WMF 8. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B]. 9. Remove the screws from the dummy cartridge [B] ( x 2). 10. With a fingernail, release the tabs on the left [C] and right [D]. Important: The development unit is top-heavy and falls easily. Hold it on the left side. 11.
PAGE 57
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [C] [A] [B] [D] [F] B132I106.WMF [E] [G] B132I106A.WMF 13. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B]. 14. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are aligned. 15. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F]. 16. Press down on the right end of the developer cartridge until the tabs [G] on the right lock.
PAGE 58
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation [D] [C] [A] [B] B132I106B.WMF [F] [E] B132I106C.WMF 17. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set properly. • Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked. • The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating away from the side of the development unit • Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not part from the development unit. 18. Fasten the cartridge [E] ( x2).
PAGE 59
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [A] [C] [B] B132R222.WMF Reassemble the PCU 1. Attach the shaft cap [A]. If you cannot attach the cap, then check the end of the development roller shaft [B]. The flat side of the shaft must point up and must be level. Important • When you turn the shaft: a) Use your fingers to turn the front and rear ends of the development roller shaft until the end of the shaft is as shown [C].
PAGE 60
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C [A] Installation [C] B132I114.WMF [B] 3. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it. 4. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU. 5. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure the tab [C] above the PCU is locked. NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly, make sure the rails [B] and grooves are engaged correctly. B132I905.WMF 6. To release the developer into the PCU, pull out the film seal [D].
PAGE 61
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Reattach the Face Plate [B] [A] 2 4 5 1 3 B132I716.WMF 1. Attach the face plate [A] with the screws in the sequence shown by the numbers above ( x 5). Important: • Do not tighten these screws too much. • Make sure the fan connector [B] is not pinched behind the face plate. 2. Connect the fan again [B] ( x 1).
PAGE 62
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation August, 2006 Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit [C] [E] [F] [D] [A] [B] B132I709.WMF 1. Turn the lever [A] counter-clockwise, and pull the drawer unit [B] out of the machine until it stops. 2. Remove the instruction sheets [C] and [D]. 3. Remove the bracket and tag [E] at the rear. 4. Remove the bracket and tag [F] at the front. Important • A sheet of paper protects the ITB if you accidentally pull the drawer out without first removing the rod.
PAGE 63
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 [C] [A] [B] 5. Raise lever D2 [A]. 6. Turn knob D1 [B] in the direction shown by the arrow. 7. Remove protective sheet [C]. 8. Lower lever D2 [A]. 9. Push the drawer into the machine until it stops. 10. Rotate handle B2 up and to the right until it stops. 1-24 B132I722.
PAGE 64
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation August, 2006 [A] B132I707.WMF 11. Locate the transfer belt release lever [A]. It was removed earlier with the shipping tape. 12. Attach the transfer belt release lever. 13. Turn it to the vertical position and make sure that it locks. Important: • The transfer belt release lever must be turned up and locked in position before you install the toner hopper.
PAGE 65
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Reinstall the Toner Hopper August, 2006 [C] [A] [D] [B] [E] [G] [F] B132I006.WMF [H] 1. Make sure that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you attach the hopper. 2. Pull the toner hopper left rail [B] and right rail [C] until they are fully extended. NOTE: If the rails were pushed in fully, it could be necessary to use a pair of needle-nose pliers to pull them out of the machine. 3. Set the toner hopper [D] on the rails.
PAGE 66
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation August, 2006 STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation Important: • Make sure that you install each STC in the correct bin. • The label on the toner cartridge must face the front of the machine. • From left to right, the bins are for Yellow→ Cyan→ Magenta→ Black. • The name of the color for each bin is on the decals that are attached to the bin release levers. [C] 1 2 [A] [D] [B] B132I107.WMF B132I108.WMF 1.
PAGE 67
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Make the Machine Level [B] B132I717.WMF [A] 1. Attach the leveling shoes [A] to the machine. 2. Place a level on the exposure glass. 3. Use a wrench to lift or lower the nuts [B] on the leveling shoes until the machine is less than 5 mm from level (measure it from front to rear and from left to right).
PAGE 68
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation Attach the PCU Stand Rack [D] [E] [B] [C] [A] B132I718.WMF 1. Hold the PCU stand rack [A] with its open end pointed as shown, and put it below the machine. 2. Attach the rack to the bottom of the machine with the magnets on the rack. 3. Make sure that the following accessories are attached to the bottom of the PCU stand [B].
PAGE 69
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Attach Decals 1. Attach the paper-installation decals to the trays. These tell you how to add new paper. • Front set decal: Attach this decal to the LCT if it is installed. ‘Front set’ means that the paper should be face up in the tray. • Back set decal: Attach these decals to the trays of the copier. ‘Back set’ means that the paper should be face down in the tray. Front Set Back Set B132I910.BMP B132I911.BMP 2.
PAGE 70
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Initializing Developer and Toner Installation August, 2006 [A] 1. At the left rear corner of the machine, make sure that the manual breaker switch [A] is UP. Important: When the breaker switch is UP, the copier is ready to be turned on. The "|" mark can be seen. B132I719.WMF Important: Before you turn the copier on, make sure that the ARDF [B] is connected to the copier at the left rear corner. 2. Connect the power cord of the copier to a power outlet. B132I720.WMF [B] 3.
PAGE 71
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 5. Close the front door after "Open Cover" appears on the display. 6. Enter the SP mode and do SP3811 001. 7. Press [Execute]. Approximately 4 minutes is necessary for this operation. SP3811 001 does these tasks: • Makes sure that all the seals are removed from each developer cartridge and that there is developer in each PCU. • Turns toner supply on, and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU. • Sends toner to the PCU to give the drum a layer of toner.
PAGE 72
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Load the Paper Trays For each paper cassette tray: 1. Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper. 2. Add paper to the trays. 3. Attach the paper size decals to the front of the paper cassette trays and the tandem tray. NOTE: It is not necessary to input the paper size setting for trays 2 and 3. This is detected automatically. Make a Test Color Print 1. Make sure that A3 or DLT paper is put in one of the trays.
PAGE 73
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 5. Remove the Color test chart C-4 from the exposure glass (this was put on the exposure glass during the previous procedure ‘Make a Test Color Print’). 6. Place the color test pattern face-down (this is the test pattern that you made in step 4). The arrow and notation (“Face down and align the arrow with the rear left corner of the exposure glass.”) must be at the rear left corner. 7. Press [Start Scanning] on the display. The machine scans the pattern one time.
PAGE 74
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Counter Display Setting The default setting for the counter is "0" (development). Do the SP setting below to set the counter for copy/print (paper count). 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Do SP5045 001 (Counter Display Setting). 3. Select the counter to use: 0 Development counter (Default) 1 Page counter Important! • THIS SETTING CAN BE DONE ONLY ONCE. AFTER IT IS SET TO "1", THE COUNTER SETTING CANNOT BE CHANGED.
PAGE 75
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters [B] [C] [A] B132I009.WMF The machine comes from the factory with the tray heaters disconnected. NOTE: Heater connection is optional, but the heaters must be connected if the location has high humidity. Speak with the customer before you connect the tray heaters. 1. Remove the left lower cover [A] ( x 5). 2.
PAGE 76
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Installation August, 2006 1.3.3 BREAKER SWITCH TEST PROCEDURE How to Test the Electrical Breaker Switch The following is the procedure for testing the electrical breaker switch. NOTE: • The breaker switch is located at the left rear corner of the machine. • When the switch is in the ON position, you can see the "|" mark on the lower part of the switch. 1. Connect the power plug. Then, push the test button [A] with the tip of a pen.
PAGE 77
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 To return the switch to the ON position: (Perform following 2 steps continuously) 1. Push down the switch to the lower (OFF) position [C]. (You will see the “o” mark.) 2. Push up the switch to the upper (ON) position [D]. (You will see the "|" mark.
PAGE 78
August, 2006 COPY TRAY (B756) Installation 1.4 COPY TRAY (B756) 1.4.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Copy Tray ........................................................................... 1 2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used).................................. 1 3. Tapping Screw (not used)................................................... 2 4. Large Cap ........................................................................... 1 5.
PAGE 79
COPY TRAY (B756) August, 2006 1.4.2 INSTALLATION [A] B756I101.WMF 1. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 2).
PAGE 80
August, 2006 COPY TRAY (B756) [D] [B] [E] [F] [A] B756I003.WMF 2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C]. 3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x3). 4. Attach the sensor harness [E] ( x1, x4). 5. Attach the actuator arm [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket.
PAGE 81
COPY TRAY (B756) August, 2006 [A] [C] [D] [B] B756I002.WMF 6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x2). 7. Attach the copy tray [B]. 8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes , , , . 9. Install the large cap [D] in the finisher power connection point.
PAGE 82
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) Installation August, 2006 1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) The A3/11" x 17" Paper Size Tray is installed in tray 1 of the copier e-STUDIO4500c/5500c. 1.5.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. A3/DLT Tray.............................................................................. 1 2. Short Connector........................................................................ 1 3. Paper Size Decal .........
PAGE 83
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 1.5.2 INSTALLATION [A] [B] B331I011.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the metal retainer [A] and packing material [B] ( x 1). 2. Check the position of the front and rear fences, and make sure that they are set for DLT or A3.
PAGE 84
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) Installation August, 2006 [B] [A] B331I707.WMF [C] B331I708.WMF 3. Open the front doors. 4. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] fully. 5. Push the right tandem tray [B] into the machine. 6. Remove the left tandem tray [C] ( x 2 left, x 3 right).
PAGE 85
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 [A] [B] B331I102.WMF B331I709.WMF 7. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] ( x 2). 8. Pull out the right tandem tray [B], then remove it. ( x 2).
PAGE 86
August, 2006 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) Installation [B] [A] [C] B331I003.WMF [D] B331I004.WMF [F] [E] 9. Put the short connector [A] into the socket in the machine [B]. NOTE: Hold the connector as shown in the illustration. 10. Install the A3 / 11”x17” paper size tray [C] on the right rail [D], center rail [E], and left rail [F]. Use the screws that you removed in Steps 6 and 8. NOTE: You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails.
PAGE 87
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 [A] B331I105.WMF 11. Install the front cover [A] ( x 2) that was removed from the left tandem tray. 12. Use SP5959 001 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or 11” x 17”). 13. After you select the paper size, turn the machine off and on to change the indicator on the operation panel.
PAGE 88
August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) Installation 1.6 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) 1.6.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. LCT (B473) Description Qty 1. Upper docking pins (grooved) .................................................... 2. Lower docking pin (not grooved, not for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). 3. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4x6 ............................................... 4. Paper Set Decal .........................................................
PAGE 89
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT Adapter (B699) Description Qty 1. Brackets ................................................................................. 2. Supports................................................................................. 3. Machine Screws (M3x8) ........................................................ 4. Machine Screws (M4x8) ....................................................... 2 3 3 6 1 2 4 3 B699I101.
PAGE 90
August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) Installation 1.6.2 INSTALLATION Removing Tape and Accessories [A] [C] [A] [B] [D] B473I001.WMF B473I002.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure. 1. Remove the filament tape [A]. 2. Remove the decals [B]. 3. Remove the tape under the lid [C]. 4. Remove the docking pins [D] (attached to the rear with tape). 5. Remove the docking pins [E].
PAGE 91
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT Adapter (B699) Installation The LCT Adapter Kit B699 must be installed before you install the LCT. [A] [B] [C] [D] [F] B699I102.WMF [E] B699I103.WMF 1. Put the LCT [A] on its front side. Important! : Do not put the LCT on its right side (the open side), or you will bend the ground plate [B]. 2. Remove the 3 casters [C] ( x 3 each). 3. Attach the 3 supports [D] ( x 1 each – M3x8 thin screws). 4. Set the LCT in a vertical position. 5.
PAGE 92
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) LCT Installation [A] [E] [B] [D] [C] [D] B699I104.WMF 1. Remove the LCT installation cover [A] from the right side of the machine. ( x 2). 2. Remove the upper covers [B]. 3. Remove the lower covers [C]. 4. Attach the brackets [D] that are supplied with the LCT Adapter (B699) ( x 2 each – M4 x 8). 5. Attach the two grooved docking pins [E]. NOTE: The docking pin without a groove is not necessary for this installation.
PAGE 93
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 [A] [E] [D] [C] [B] B699I115.WMF 6. Remove the connector cover [A]. 7. Align the holes on the side of the LCT [B] with the docking pins [C] on the side of the machine. 8. Slowly push the LCT onto the pins. NOTE: The release button [D] is used to unlock the LCT. 9. Connect the plug [E] of the LCT power connector to the side of the machine.
PAGE 94
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) Installation August, 2006 [A] [B] [C] B699I107.WMF 10. Open the upper cover [A]. 11. Remove the cover [B] ( x 2). 12. Attach screws [C] to the brackets on the side of the machine. 13. Attach the cover [B] with the screw that you removed in Step 11. 14. Turn the machine on. 15. Enter the SP mode. 16. Do SP5959 005. NOTE: The side fences of the NA model are set for 81/2” x 11” paper. You must select the paper size with this SP. 17.
PAGE 95
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 81/2" x 11" (LT) Important: Start the following procedure after the copier installation and LCT installation are both completed. This is because to do the following procedure, the copier main power must be turned ON. 1. Turn ON the copier main power. 2. Open the LCT top cover [A]. [A] 3. Hold down the LCT bottom plate function button [B] while covering the photo sensor [C].
PAGE 96
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) 4. Move the side fence brackets [E] from the A4 position to the 81/2" x 11" (LT) position (1 screw for each bracket). NOTE: The various side fence positions are written on the bracket [F]. [F] [E] 5. Remove the shaft [H] from the backside of the LCT top cover (1 snap ring [G]).
PAGE 97
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 6. Move the LCT end fence [I] from the A4 position to the 81/2" x 11" (LT) position. 7. Insert the shaft [H] (1 snap ring). NOTE: NOTE: The various end fence positions are written on the LCT top cover [J]. [J] [I] [H] 8. Close the LCT top cover [K]. [K] 9. Set Sp5959-005 to a value of 1 (for 81/2" x 11" (LT)).
PAGE 98
81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) Installation August, 2006 1.7 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) The 81/2" x 14"/B4 (B474) is installed in the LCT (B473). 1.7.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Tapping screws - M4x8 .......................................................... 4 2. Tapping hex screws - M4x8 ................................................... 6 3. Harness clamp ...........................................................
PAGE 99
81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) August, 2006 1.7.2 INSTALLATION LCT Connected to the Machine [A] B474I001.WMF [C] [B] [D] B474I508.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. If the LCT is connected to the copier: • Open the cover and remove the paper. • Close the cover. • Turn the main power switch off. • Disconnect the LCT from the copier. 2. Remove the LCT cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Remove the right cover [B] ( x 2). 4.
PAGE 100
August, 2006 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) Installation 7. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down ( x 2). NOTE: If the brackets are not easy to install, lift the bottom plate with your hand. [B] 8. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down ( x 2). 9. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex screws ( x 4). [A] [C] B474I502.WMF 10. Remove the casters from the bottom of the B4/LG frame [D] [D] 11. Align the positioning pin [E]. 12.
PAGE 101
81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) August, 2006 [A] [B] B474I506.WMF 14. Attach the cover [A] (81/2" x 14"/B4) ( x 1). 15. Attach the right cover [B] ( x 2). 16. Connect the LCT to the machine. 17. Turn the machine on. 18. Enter the SP mode. 19. Do SP5959 005. 20. Input “5” for B4 SEF or “6” for 81/2" x 14" SEF.
PAGE 102
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) 1.8 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) 1.8.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty 1. Cushion (with double-sided tape)........................................... 1 2. Ground (earth) plate............................................................... 1 3. Tapping screws - M4 x14 ...................................................... 4 4. Tapping screws - M4 x 8 ....................................................... 2 5. Leveling Shoes .....................................
PAGE 103
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 1.8.2 INSTALLATION This section shows the installation instructions for two finishers: • B700 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, stapling, and saddle-stitching with staples. This booklet finisher can be used with the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c. • B701 3000-Sheet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, and stapling but with no saddle-stitching unit. This finisher can be used with the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c.
PAGE 104
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) B700 Installation Removing Tapes and Packing Materials B701 B701I102.WMF B700I102.WMF 1. Remove the machine from its box, and remove all the wrapping. 2. Remove all filament tape and packing material from the finisher. B701 B700 B701I202.WMF B700I202.WMF 3. Open the front door. 4. Remove all tapes and packing materials inside the finisher.
PAGE 105
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 B700 B701 [A] [A] B701I204.WMF B700I204.WMF 5. Pull the jogger unit [A] out of the finisher. 6. Remove the tapes and retainers.
PAGE 106
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Installation Docking the Finisher to the Copier [A] [C] B700I106.WMF 1. If you will not install the Cover Interposer B704: [B] • Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and attach it to the finisher, then go to Step 2. Important! Do not put the sponge in a position that will prevent air flow through the air duct [B] on the copier after the finisher is connected to the copier.
PAGE 107
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 [A] [B] B700I105.WMF 2. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14). 3. Attach the front joint bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
PAGE 108
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Installation August, 2006 [F] [E] [C] [D] [B] [A] B700I107.WMF 4. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] ( x 1). 5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [D] go into their slots. If you do this too quickly, you will bend and cause damage to the paper-entrance guide plates [C]. 6. Attach and tighten the screw removed in Step 5. 7. Connect finisher connector [E] to the main frame. 8.
PAGE 109
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 Attaching the Trays B700 B701 [B] [B] [A] [A] [C] B701I208.WMF B700I208.WMF B700 1. Attach the upper output tray [A] ( x 1, M3 x 6). NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray. 2. Attach the lower output tray [C]. B701 1. Attach the upper output tray [A]. NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray.
PAGE 110
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Installation Leveling the Finisher [C] [B] B701I109.WMF [A] 1. Put the leveling shoes [A] (x 3) below the feet [B]. 2. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws [C] to make the machine level.
PAGE 111
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 Support Tray [A] B700I110.WMF [B] Take the following steps if the "Exit Tray Full" message displays even though the exit tray is not full. (The message is caused by the trailing edges of excessively curled paper activating the tray full sensor [A] before the tray is actually full.) 1. Remove the paper form the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, then print. 2.
PAGE 112
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Selecting the Staple Supply Name Enter the SP mode and input this information. 5841 Supply Name Setting 013 Staple Std3 022 Staple Bind2 These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List Push the Counter key, then push ‘Print Inquiry List’. Push the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen. Input the name of the staples that are used for standard stapling (not booklet stapling). This setting should be done for the B700 and B701.
PAGE 113
PUNCH UNIT (B702) August, 2006 1.9 PUNCH UNIT (B702) The Punch Unit B702 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. 1.9.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Punchout Waste Unit .......................................................... 1 2. Slide Drive Unit ................................................................... 1 3. Punch Waste Hopper.......................................................... 1 4. Screws (M3 x 6) .......
PAGE 114
PUNCH UNIT (B702) 1.9.2 INSTALLATION [G] [B] [A] [C] [D] [H] B702I102.WMF [D] [E] Rear [F] Front B702I103.WMF 1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and move the finisher away from the copier. 2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door. NOTE: At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the cover to the frame. 3. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2). 4.
PAGE 115
PUNCH UNIT (B702) August, 2006 [A] B702I104.WMF [C] 3-pin connector [B] B702I105.WMF 6. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punching unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach screw . 7. Make sure that the punching unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws. 8. Put the side-to-side detection unit [B] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly at the front. 9.
PAGE 116
PUNCH UNIT (B702) Installation August, 2006 [D] [B] 4-pin Connector [C] B702I106.WMF [A] B702I107.WMF 12. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover. 13. Install the punchout waste unit [B] in the finisher. NOTE: Make sure that the punchout waste unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves. 14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C]. NOTE: This is the 4-pin connector. 15.
PAGE 117
MAILBOX (B762) August 2006 1.10 MAILBOX (B762) The Mailbox B762 is installed on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. 1.10.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Trays ...................................................................................... 9 2. Guide plate............................................................................. 1 3. Decals (bin display)................................................................ 1 4.
PAGE 118
August 2006 MAILBOX (B762) Installation 1.10.2 INSTALLATION [A] [B] B762I101.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. Remove the filament tape [A]. Important: Move the mailbox carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the corner leaf plate [B].
PAGE 119
MAILBOX (B762) August 2006 [A] [B] B762I102.WMF 2. If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700/B701, remove it. NOTE: The cover interposer tray and mail box cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time. 3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher ( x1). 4. Remove the bracket [B] ( x1).
PAGE 120
MAILBOX (B762) Installation August 2006 [A] B762I103.WMF [B] [C] [D] B762I104.WMF 5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x2, M3x8). 6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x4, M3x8). 7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox. 8. Give the decals [D] to the customer. The customer will write on these and attach them at the correct location.
PAGE 121
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 1.11 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) 1.11.1 ACCESSORIES 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Table Extension ..................................................................... 1 2. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 4 3. Rear Joint Bracket ..................................................
PAGE 122
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Installation August 2006 Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Upper Transport Motor Bracket.............................................. 1 2. Timing Belt ............................................................................. 1 3. Short Connector..................................................................... 1 4. Harness......................................
PAGE 123
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 1.11.2 INSTALLATION WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure. Shipping tape and retainers B706I002.WMF 1. Remove the finisher from its box. Remove all tapes and packing materials.
PAGE 124
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Installation August 2006 [A] B706I102.WMF [B] [C] [D] [E] B706I101.WMF 2. Open the front door [A] and remove tape and packing materials. 3. Pull the jogger unit [B] out of the finisher. 4. Remove brackets [C], [D], and [E] ( x 2 each) with their red tags and wires, and all tapes and packing materials.
PAGE 125
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 Finisher Adapter B698 Installation [C] [A] B698I102.WMF [B] 1. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( x2). 2. Connect the short connector [B] to CN137 on the finisher main board. 3. Remove the upper transport motor mount [C] ( x1, x3, spring x1). 1-86 B698I103.
PAGE 126
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Installation August 2006 [C] [A] [B] [D] B698I104.WMF 4. Remove the transport motor [A] from the original bracket [B] ( x4). 5. Set the motor on the new bracket [C] supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698. 6. Attach the timing belt [D]. 7. Use the same screws to attach the transport motor to the new bracket ( x4).
PAGE 127
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 [B] [D] [A] [C] [E] B698I105.WMF [F] 8. Remove the harness clamp [A]. 9. Use wire cutters or radio pliers to remove harness clamp [B]. 10. Attach the transport motor assembly [C]. ( x3, x2, spring x1). • The harness [D] is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698. • Attach the screws but do not tighten. Pull the spring slightly to apply tension, then tighten the screws. 11.
PAGE 128
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Installation August 2006 [C] [B] [A] B698I106.WMF [D] B698I107.WMF 12. Put the harness clamps [A] and [B] (supplied with the B698) in the holes ( x2). Important: Be sure to put the harness clamps in the holes as shown. 13. Install the harnesses through the clamps and close the clamps. 14. Make sure that the harnesses do not touch the motor. 15. Attach the finisher rear cover. 16. Open the front door.
PAGE 129
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 Finisher Installation [C] [A] [E] [B] B698I108.WMF B706I004.WMF [D] 1. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2) (M4 x 14). 2. Attach the front joint bracket [B] ( x 2) (M4 x 14). 3. Remove the connector cover [C]. 4. Attach the ground plate [E] ( x 2) (M3 x 6). Important: Set the grounding plate so there is no gap [D] between the ground plate and the bottom frame of the finisher.
PAGE 130
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Installation August 2006 [B] [C] [A] B706I005.WMF [D] B706I207.WMF 5. Install the table extension [A] ( x 2) (M4 x 8). 6. Make sure that the edge of the table extension is aligned with the edge of the finisher [B]. 7. If you will not install the Cover Interposer Tray B704: • Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [C], and attach it to the finisher. • Attach the entrance guide plate [D] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
PAGE 131
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 [B] [H] [E] [D] [C] [A] [G] [G] [F] B706I006.WMF [F] 8. Attach the shift tray [A] ( x 4) (M3 x 8). 9. Open the front door [B] of the finisher. 10. Remove the screw [C] from the lock lever [D], then pull out the lock lever. 11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets [E] and push the finisher against the side of the copier. 12.
PAGE 132
August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Enter the SP mode and input this information 5841 012 Supply Name Setting Staple Std These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List. To print this list press User Tools> [Inquiry]> [Print Inquiry List]> [Start]. Input the name of the staples that are used for corner stapling. This setting should be done for the B706 with B698.
PAGE 133
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 3. Peel the two-sided tape [B] off the stopper bracket [C]. 4. Attach the stopper bracket to position [D]. See details below. [C] [D] [E] [B] Important: • Make sure the stopper bracket [C] is flat against the edge of bracket [G]. • Make sure the stopper bracket [C] covers the shaft [F]. NOTE: The stopper bracket [C] limits the movement of the paper pressure unit [E].
PAGE 134
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B531 Installation 1.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 The Punch Unit B531 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 1.12.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Punch unit................................................................................. 2. Punch Waste Hopper................................................................ 3. Sensor Arm and Sensor............................................................ 4.
PAGE 135
PUNCH UNIT B531 August 2006 1.12.2 INSTALLATION [A] [C] [B] [D] [F] B531I09.WMF [E] B531I002.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2). 3. Remove the punch unit from its packing materials. Remove the motor protector plate [A] ( x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] ( x 1). 4. Remove the inner cover [C] ( x 3). 5.
PAGE 136
PUNCH UNIT B531 Installation August 2006 [A] B531I003.WMF [B] [C] B531I004.WMF 7. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4). 8. Install the sensor arm and sensor [B] ( x 1), small step screw (M3 x 4). NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw. 9. Attach the spring [C].
PAGE 137
PUNCH UNIT B531 August 2006 [B] [E] B531I006.WMF [A] [D] [C] B531I005.WMF 10. At the rear side of the finisher, put the punch unit [A] in the finisher. 11. At the front side, attach the punch unit [B] with the large step screw ( x 1, M4 x 10). 12. At the rear, attach the 2 mm spacer [C] and attach the tapping screws [D] to the punch unit ( x 2, M4 x 10).
PAGE 138
PUNCH UNIT B531 Installation August 2006 [C] [E] [D] [A] [F] [B] B531I007.WMF B531I008.WMF 14. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the punch unit PCB. 15. Connect the HP Sensor-2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP Sensor-2. 16. Connect the end of the hopper-full-sensor cable that has one connector [C] to the hopper full sensor on the arm ( x 1, clamp x 1).
PAGE 139
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) August 2006 1.13 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The Output Jogger Unit B513 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 1.13.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Jogger Unit ................................................................................... 1 2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6..............................................
PAGE 140
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) Installation August 2006 1.13.2 INSTALLATION [B] [A] B703I103.WMF B703I102.WMF 1. Turn the main machine switch off. 2. Disconnect the finisher cable from the main frame. 3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A]. 4. Remove the cover plate [B] ( x 2). Keep the screws.
PAGE 141
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) August 2006 [B] [C] [A] B703I104.WMF 5. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector [B] on the left, put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame. 6. Fasten connector [B] to the socket ( x 1). 7. Attach the jogger unit to the finisher ( x 2, M3 x 6). 8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit ( x 2).
PAGE 142
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Installation August 2006 1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) 1.14.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Front door extension (top)...................................................... 1 2. Rear cover extension (bottom)............................................... 1 3. Shoulder screws .................................................................... 3 4. Tapping screws – M4 x 8 ......................................
PAGE 143
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 1.14.2 INSTALLATION You can install the Cover Interposer Tray B704 on these finishers: • 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 • 3000-Sheet Finisher B701 • 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Removing Tapes and Packing Materials [A] [B] B704I102.WMF WARNING! Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine, and that the copier is turned off and the power cord is disconnected, before you start this procedure. 1.
PAGE 144
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Installation August 2006 Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) [A] [B] [C] B704I103.WMF 1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector. 2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] ( x 1) then remove the bracket. 3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (This guide plate will be attached to the cover interposer; do not discard it.
PAGE 145
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attaching the Extensions for the B706 Important! • The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the B706 only. • If you will install the cover interposer with the B700/B701, go to the next section. Modify the Attachments for the B706 Front Door Extension (Top) Rear Cover Extension (Bottom) [D] [A] [E] [G] [C] [B] [F] [H] Bottom Plate Extension B704I108.WMF Front Door Extension: 1.
PAGE 146
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Installation August 2006 Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706 [C] [A] [B] B706I900.WMF 1. Remove spacer [A] ( x1). 2. Attach spacer [B] ( x1). 3. Remove the screws from the connector case [C] ( x2). 4. Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes are aligned with the holes below, then attach the screws.
PAGE 147
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attach the Extensions to the B706 [E] [A] [F] [B] [D] [C] B704I110.WMF 1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] ( x 3). 2. If the finisher was previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and keep the screws. 3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6). 4. Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate ( x 2). 5. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8). NOTE: Attach this cover first. 6.
PAGE 148
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Installation August 2006 Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701 [A] [E] [F] [B] [D] [C] B704I104.WMF 1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] ( x 3). 2. If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and save the screws. 3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6) then attach the ground plate to the bottom plate ( x 2). 4. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8). 5.
PAGE 149
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706) [B] [A] [C] B704I105.WMF 1. Pick up the cover interposer tray, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder screws [B], then slide the cover interposer down onto the screws. 2. Secure the cover interposer with the screw [C] ( x 1, M3 x 6). 3. If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B700/B701, skip the next section and go directly to “Docking Finisher and Interposer” on page 1-11307.
PAGE 150
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Installation August 2006 Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706 Important: • The corner plates are installed on the B706 only. Right Rear Corner Plate (B706 only) NG OK [C] [D] [A] [B] B704I112.WMF 1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with about two turns) to the right end of the finisher extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8) NOTE: The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape. Just punch the screws through the holes. 2.
PAGE 151
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 [C] [B] [A] B704I111.WMF 4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with about two turns to fasten to the panel at the right front corner. NOTE: The hole is not invisible because it covered with tape. Just punch the screw through the hole. 5. With the clamp [B] under the edge of the corner, align the cutout [C] in the right front corner plate with the screw, then snap it into position. 6.
PAGE 152
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Docking Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (B700/B701/B706) [C] [A] [B] [D] 1. Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x14). 2. Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x14). 3. Attach the gasket seals [C] and [D]. 1-113 B704I121.
PAGE 153
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) [B] August 2006 [C] [G] [E] [A] [F] [D] B704I106.WMF 4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher. 5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer. • Attach the front end [B] of the plate ( x 1). • Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] ( x 1). Important: Use the two small tapping screws that are supplied, and not the machine screws removed from the finisher guide plate. 6.
PAGE 154
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.1 OVERVIEW The machine controller box has five board slots and 3 SD cards. Make sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot. For more, please see the decal on the controller box. NEXT COPIER KEY CARD A I/F Card Slot L-ADP C A File Format Converter D B Tandem C External CTL B D Option SD Card Slot 3: Service (Firmware Update) E Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.
PAGE 155
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.2 ACCESSORY CARDS B737I102.WMF No. Code B328 EFI-V G815 - Name Not use Copy Connector Type 3260 EFI Printer Controller (E-7000) Not use Not use Not use Not use Printer/Scanner unit GM-2100 Slot A B C D D D D E Page 1-132 1-134 1-123 Note: Items , , , , must be in the same slot. Because of this, only one of these cards can be installed at the same time.
PAGE 156
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation 1.15.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS [A] B132I909.WMF These applications are available on SD cards [A]. You install them in Slot 2: • Printer/Scanner Unit GM-2100 • PostScript3 Unit Type 3260 (B761) • Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C (B735) Slot 2 is the only slot available for these application SD cards. If the customer must use more than one application, then the applications must be put together on one SD card. ( 1.15.
PAGE 157
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you install a controller option. Important! • To prevent damage to the controller box, always do your work carefully. Do not put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
PAGE 158
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 1.15.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD Overview Only one SD card slot is available for SD card applications. The machine has three SD card slots. Slot 1 is used for the system card. Slot 2 is used for application programs, and Slot 3 is used for servicing only.
PAGE 159
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Merging Applications Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card. 1. Turn off the copier. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x2). 3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 3 (top slot). This card contains the application that you want to copy. NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card, because it cannot be copied. 4. Put the Target SD card in Slot 2 (middle slot). The application on the card in Slot 3 will be copied to this card. 5.
PAGE 160
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 Undo Exec 1. Turn the main switch off. 2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in SD Card Slot 2. 3. Put the original destination SD card (the one stored in the front door) into Slot 3. NOTE: The SD card in Slot 3 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move from Slot 2 to Slot 3. You cannot use any blank SD card in Slot 3. 4. Turn the main switch on. 5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec) 6.
PAGE 161
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Storing SD Application Cards on Site [C] [B] [A] B132I728.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the cover [A] on the door ( x2). 3. Remove the block [B]. 4. Store the SD cards [C] inside the cover. 5. Attach the cover to the machine.
PAGE 162
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 1.15.6 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT GM-2100 (B737) Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Qty 1. Scanner/Printer DIMM ........................................................... 1 2. NIB (Network Interface Board)............................................... 1 3. Printer/Scanner SD card......................................................... 1 4. Screws - M3x8........................................................
PAGE 163
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Installation WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. NOTE: For the printer/scanner unit, the machine must have a minimum of 128 MB of memory (more is recommended). Memory chips are not supplied with this option. [F] [E] [A] [B] B132I710.WMF [C] [D] B737I107.WMF 1. Disconnect the ARDF cable [A] ( x1). 2. Remove the controller board [B] ( x3). 3.
PAGE 164
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 10. Wind the Ethernet cable [A] around the ferrite core [B] as shown. 150 mm (6 in.) 11. Make sure there is a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) between the ferrite core and the end of the cable. 12. Close the ferrite core. 13. Connect the RJ45 plug [C] on the Ethernet cable to the NIB. [A] [C] [B] B737I900.WMF [D] 14. Replace the old key top assembly [D] with the new key tops [E]. [E] 15.
PAGE 165
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 USB SP Settings The following SP commands are available. But, only one setting can be adjusted, and this must only be done if the customer has USB data transmission errors. NOTE: Do not change the settings marked “DFU”. These settings are for design and factory use only. To go into the SP mode: 1. Press ‘Clear Modes’ 2. On the operation panel keypad, input 107. 3. Hold down [Clear/Stop] ( ) for more than 3 seconds. 4.
PAGE 166
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 1.15.7 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 3260 (B761) Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q’ty 1. SD Card................................................................................. 1 [A] [B] B132I909.WMF 1. Remove the slot cover [A]. 2. Put the PostScript3 SD card [B] in SD card slot 2 (middle slot). Important • Only one SD card slot is available for applications.
PAGE 167
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.8 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B735) Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q’ty 2. SD Card................................................................................. 1 Before You Begin… You must copy the DataOverwriteSecurity card to another application SD card. The original SD card, with the DataOverwriteSecurity application only, cannot be used.
PAGE 168
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Installation August 2006 Seal Check And Removal [A] B692I901.WMF B692I903.WMF [B] CAUTION Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory. 1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box. • Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner. • The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do not install the components in the box. 2.
PAGE 169
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Installation Procedure CAUTION The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected before you do this procedure. 1. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch. 2. Disconnect the network cable (if the machine is connected to a network). 3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2). 4. Install the SD Card [B] into slot 2, then attach the slot cover. 5. Connect the network cable (if the machine is connected to a network). [A] 6.
PAGE 170
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 7. Enter the SP mode and do SP5878. 8. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power switch off. 9. Turn the machine power on. 10. Enter the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator> Auto Erase Memory Setting> On. 11. Go out of the User Tools mode. [A] [B] 09/09/2003 Origi. 14:13 Total 0 [C] Copies 1 0 B692I904.WMF B692I905.WMF 12. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed. 13.
PAGE 171
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.9 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE 3260 (B328) [A] [B] B737I904.WMF 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure. 2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B ( x 2). 3. Install the Copy Connector Board B328 [B] in Slot B and attach it with the screws. 4. Remove the rear upper cover. ( See 3.3.
PAGE 172
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS [G] Installation [F] [B] [C] [A] [D] [E] B737I112A.WMF 5. Remove the controller box cover [C] ( x3). 6. Connect the power repeater cable [B] to: CN594 CN4 7. Reattach the controller box cover and rear upper cover. 8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to install the connection kit on the second machine. 9. Insert the end of the interface cable [C] to the connection PCB. 10. If additional cable is required, connect the cables [E] with repeater hubs [D]. 11.
PAGE 173
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.10 EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (G815) [A] [B] B737I905.WMF 1. Turn the machine off. 2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot C ( x 2). 3. Install the EFI Printer Controller (G815) board [B] in Slot C and attach it with the screws.
PAGE 174
August, 2006 OVERVIEW 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2.1 OVERVIEW The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints or copies unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter. Required Materials Item Optical Cloth Alcohol Exposure Glass Cleaner Lubricant Powder No. A0129111 --A1939310 B1329700 Important • The Lubricant Powder (B1329700) (composed of Zinc Stearate) is specially designed for this machine (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c).
PAGE 175
PM COUNTER August, 2006 2.2 PM COUNTER The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for both units and individual components. 2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER 1. Press [Clear Modes] ( )> "107"> [Clear/Stop] ( ). B132P901.BMP 2. Press [PM Counter]. B132P902.BMP All PM Parts List. Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM items regardless of PM yield indicator settings. ( Pg.2-4) Parts list for PM yield indicator.
PAGE 176
August, 2006 PM COUNTER 2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS All PM Parts list: Main Menu The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM items, regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings". ( Pg.2-4) [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] B132P903.BMP [A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu. ( Pg.2-4) [B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not individual item). [C]: PM yield buttons.
PAGE 177
PM COUNTER August, 2006 Number button submenu Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, the number button [001] #K:PCU was pressed. [A] [B] [D] [C] B132P904.BMP [A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this example 001 #K:PCU) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the [Clear] button on the right side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] on the previous page). [B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield.
PAGE 178
August, 2006 PM COUNTER Parts list for PM yield indicator This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed. [A] B132P905.BMP Note the following: • The # mark denotes a unit. • Items without the # (065 ITB) denote individual components. • An asterisk will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that that have exceeded their target PM yields.
PAGE 179
PM TABLES August, 2006 2.3 PM TABLES 2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE Symbol Key for PM Tables I: Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed. C: Cleaning required. R: Replacement required. L: Lubrication required.
PAGE 180
August, 2006 PM TABLES 150K PCU Charge Roller Unit Drum Cleaning Blade Lubricant Bar Lubricant Brush 300K PCU Joint R C C C C C C Blower brush. Note: Never use a vacuum cleaner around this sensor. R R C Development Roller Idle Gear Development Unit Service Life: 1200K Blower brush Service Life: 600K Blower brush ( 3.5.
PAGE 181
PM TABLES August, 2006 150K 300K FUSING UNIT Fusing Belt Hot Roller Pressure Roller Hot Roller Cleaning Roller Pressure Roller Cleaning Felt Roller Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller Heating Roller Heating Roller Shaft Bearings Hot Roller Shaft Bearings Pressure Roller Shaft Bearings Hot Roller Cleaning Roller Shaft Bearings Fusing Belt Strippers / Pressure Roller Strippers Thermistors 600K Note R R R R R R C, L ( 3.9.
PAGE 182
August, 2006 PM TABLES 150K 300K PAPER FEED (Trays) Feed Guide Plate Grip Rollers (Drive & Idle) Pick-up Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3) Paper Feed Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3) Separation Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3) 600K EM C C Grip Roller (Drive Roller) Paper Feed Sensor Vertical Feed Sensors Paper-End Sensor Dry cloth Alcohol, dry cloth Service Life: 1000K Replace if jams, double-feeds occur with increasing frequency.
PAGE 183
PM TABLES August, 2006 ARDF PM Parts NOTE: The "K" number in the table below is the number of originals that have been fed.
PAGE 184
August, 2006 PM TABLES 2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701 300K 2400K 3000K 4000K FINISHER Covers Drive Rollers Idle Rollers Anti-Static Brush Sensors Corner Stapler R Booklet Stapler R EM Note I,C C C C C Alcohol or water, dry cloth Damp cloth, dry cloth Damp cloth, dry cloth Dry cloth Blower brush Print an SMC report with SP5990. Replace the unit if the staple count is 500K. Print an SMC report with SP5990. Replace the unit if the staple count is 200K. 2.3.
PAGE 185
PM TABLES August, 2006 2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 60K 120K 180K EM The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed. Feed Belt R R R Replace as a set. Pick-up Roller R R R Separation Roller R R R Driver Rollers Idle Rollers Discharge Brush Sensors C C C C C C C C C C C C Note Damp clean cloth. Blower brush. 2.3.7 LCT B473 Paper feed roller Pick-up roller Separation roller Transport guide plate Grip roller 1000K R R R 2000K R R R 3000K R R R Inspect and clean every 350K.
PAGE 186
August, 2006 LUBRICATION POINTS 2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS 2.4.1 COPIER OPC, ITB Replacement [A] [B] B132R319.WMF B023R960.WMF Be sure to apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 when re-installing the drum [A] or ITB [B]. For more, please refer to section "3. Replacement and Adjustment".
PAGE 187
LUBRICATION POINTS August, 2006 Fusing Unit [B] [A] [G] [H] [I] [C] [G] [I] B132P906.WMF [F] [E] [D] B132P907.WMF [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] Part Name Hot Roller Drive Gear Exit Idle Gear Upper Gear Lower Gear Bearing Race φ20 x φ32 x 7 Hot Roller Sleeve Bearing Race φ25 x φ37 x 7 Hot Roller Sleeve Bearing Race Lubricant Barrierta S552R Comment Brush all gear teeth Barrierta S552R Be sure to brush both ends.
PAGE 188
August, 2006 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS Never switch off either power switch while any of the electrical components are operating. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum, and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier. 3.1.1 DRUM An organic photoconductor (OPC) drums are more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum. 1.
PAGE 189
GENERAL CAUTIONS August, 2006 3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands. 2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged. 3. Before installing a new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping. 3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT 1. When installing a new exposure glass, make sure that the white paint mark is at the rear left corner. 2.
PAGE 190
August, 2006 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT 1. Avoid nicking or scratching the development roller. 2. Place a development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from a PCU. 3. Always clean the drive gears after removing used developer. 4. Always dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations. 5. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering. 6.
PAGE 191
GENERAL CAUTIONS August, 2006 3.1.7 CLEANING 1. When servicing cleaning components, avoid nicking the edges of the cleaning blades. 2. Never handle a cleaning blade with bare hands. 3. Before disassembling a cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any toner falling. 3.1.8 FUSING UNIT 1. Never handle fusing lamps and rollers with bare hands. 2. Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly and do not touch the inner surface of the rollers. 3.1.9 PAPER FEED 1.
PAGE 192
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.1 ARDF [A] [B] [C] B132R101.WMF 1. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position. 2. At the rear, left corner of the machine, disconnect the ARDF cable. 3. Remove the left screw [B] and right screw [C]. 4. Slide the ARDF back until the heads of the screws are in the large end of the keyholes, then lift the ARDF off the machine. CAUTION The ARDF is very heavy. Remove it carefully.
PAGE 193
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS [B] [C] [A] [D] • Remove the ARDF ( x1, x2). • Open the front door. Remove: [A]: Operation panel ( x1, x2) [B]: Top rear cover ( x2) [C]: Left top cover ( x1) [D]: Right top cover ( x1) 3-6 B132R701.
PAGE 194
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.3 LEFT COVERS [A] [B] B132R702.WMF • If a finisher is installed, disconnect it. Then remove the front and rear finisher joint brackets. Remove: [A]: Left upper cover ( x2) [B]: Left lower cover ( x5) Reinstallation • Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.
PAGE 195
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.4 FRONT DOOR [A] [B] B132R703.WMF 1. Grip the front door [A] with one hand. 2. Press down the hinge bracket [B]. 3. Lift the front door slightly to remove it. Important: If you must replace the front door, make sure that you put the SD cards from the storage location in the old front door into the storage location in the new front door. ( 3.2.
PAGE 196
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS [C] [B] [A] [D] B132R704.WMF Remove: • Disconnect and separate the LCT if it is installed. [A]: LCT installation cover ( x2). This has been removed already if the LCT has been installed. [B]: Open the bypass tray. [C]: Right upper cover ( x2). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as you remove it. [D]: Right lower cover ( x5). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as you remove it.
PAGE 197
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.6 REAR COVERS [A] [B] [C] B132R705.WMF Remove: [A]: ARDF connector ( x1) [B]: Rear upper cover ( x3) [C]: Rear lower cover ( x2) • Remove the bottom screws • Do not remove the shoulder screws.
PAGE 198
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACE PLATE, PCU Removing Toner Hopper, Face plate, PCU [A] [B] [C] B132I006A.WMF Important: To avoid damaging the toner end sensor, make sure that the main power switch is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power source before you remove the toner hopper. To remove the toner hopper: 1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the toner hopper. 2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper [A] ( x3). 3.
PAGE 199
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 To remove the face plate [B] [A] [C] B132R201.WMF [D] B132I902.WMF 8. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops. 9. Disconnect the fan connector [B]. 10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x5). 11. Place the PCU stand [D] on a flat surface. NOTE: The PCU stand is mounted on a rack attached to the bottom of the copier with magnets. 12. Wipe the surface of the stand with a clean cloth to remove dust.
PAGE 200
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES To remove a PCU [A] [B] B132R202A.WMF Important: To prevent damage to the drum potential sensor and its relay board, always make sure that the machine is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power source before you remove a PCU. 13. While pressing down the release tab [A] above the PCU, pull the PCU [B] out of the machine.
PAGE 201
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 R [A] F [B] B132R214.WMF IMPORTANT • THE OPC DRUM IS EXPOSED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE PCU. • NEVER PLACE YOUR HAND UNDER THE PCU. • NEVER PLACE THE PCU ON ANY SURFACE OTHER THAN THE PCU STAND. 14. Set the PCU [A] on the PCU stand [B]. NOTE: In the diagram, F is the front, and R is the rear.
PAGE 202
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES Reinstalling PCU, Face plate, Toner Hopper To reinstall a PCU: [B] B132I114.WMF [A] 1. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it 2. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU. 3. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure the release tab [C] above the PCU is locked. NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly, make sure the rails [B] and grooves are engaged correctly.
PAGE 203
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 [A] 2 4 [C] 1 [B] 5 3 B132I115.WMF To reinstall the face plate: 1. When you reattach the face plate [A], fasten the screws in the order shown by the numbers above ( x5). Important: Do not over tighten these screws. 2. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [B] clockwise to lock it. 3. Reconnect the fan connector [C] ( x1).
PAGE 204
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES [A] [D] [B] [C] [E] [F] B132R908.WMF To reinstall the toner hopper: 1. Confirm that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you reattach the toner hopper. 2. Make sure the toner hopper rails are fully extended, then set the toner hopper [B] on the rails. 3. Make sure the steel tabs of the toner hopper are inserted into the holes on the left rail [C] and right rail [D]. 4. Push up the release [E] and support leg [F].
PAGE 205
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT [B] [C] [A] [D] B132R201.WMF 1. Cover the floor or a table with paper to prepare a place to put the image transfer unit. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the toner hopper then push the hopper rails into the machine. ( 3.2.7) 4. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops. 5. Disconnect the fan connector [B]. 6. Remove the face plate [C] ( x1, x5). 7.
PAGE 206
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 1 [A] B132R309.WMF 8. Slowly and carefully pull the image transfer unit [A] out of the machine. [C] Important! [B] • Remove carefully. The image transfer unit is heavy and not attached to the rails with screws. • To prevent toner scattering inside and outside the unit, keep the unit [B] flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it, and put it down. B132R309B.
PAGE 207
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT [B] B132R900.WMF [C] [A] [D] To pull out the drawer unit: B132R301.WMF 1. Remove the front door. ( 3.2.4) 2. Rotate the lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops. 3. Grip the lever and pull the unit [B] out of the machine until it stops. To remove the drawer unit: 4. Disconnect from the left rail [C] ( x2). 5. Disconnect from the right rail [D] ( x2). 6. Lift the unit off the rails. CAUTION The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.).
PAGE 208
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES To re-install the drawer unit [C] [A] [B] B132R617.WMF 1. Remove the right upper cover and the left upper cover. ( 3.2.3, 3.2.5,) 2. Open the front door. 3. Pull out the left rail and right rail. 4. Set the unit on the rails. CAUTION The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.). Make sure that hooks are engaged with the holes on the rails. 5. Slowly push the unit into the machine until it stops. 6. Rotate the lever [A] clockwise to the vertical position. 7.
PAGE 209
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT [B] [C] [A] B132R501.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull the duplex unit [A] out until it stops. 3. Remove the clip ring [B] from the left, rear corner ( x1). 4. Remove the clip ring [C] from the right, rear corner ( x1). 5. Lift the duplex unit from the rails and place it on a flat, level surface.
PAGE 210
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER [B] [D] [C] [A] B132R715.WMF CAUTION: 1) Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. 2) To prevent personal injury and damage to the controller box, when the controller box is open, it should always be locked as described below. 1. Remove the rear covers ( 3.2.6) 2. Remove controller box screws . 3.
PAGE 211
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE [C] [B] B132R728.WMF [A] 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the cover [A] on the door ( x2). 3. Remove the block [B]. 4. Store extra SD cards [C] inside the cover. 5. Reattach the cover to the machine Important • When you replace the door, confirm whether SD cards are stored here. • Remove any SD cards and store them in the new door. These SD cards serve as prove of purchase of MFP options by the customer.
PAGE 212
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS [A] [B] [C] B132R128.
PAGE 213
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS [A] [B] [D] [C] B132R130.WMF B132R141.WMF Before you remove the lens block, note the settings of SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). SP4800 001 SP4800 002 SP4800 003 DF Density Adj: R DF Density Adj: G DF Density Adj: B ARDF Density Adjustment - Red ARDF Density Adjustment - Green ARDF Density Adjustment - Blue Remove: • Exposure glass. ( 3.3.
PAGE 214
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP [B] [A] B132R129.WMF Remove: • Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) • Operation panel ( 3.2.2) 1. Slide the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout in the frame. 2. Remove the exposure lamp [B] ( x1, x1, x1) Important: • Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers. • Work carefully to avoid damaging the relay plugs attached to the rear ends of the lamp.
PAGE 215
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR [A] [B] [C] [E] B132R132A.WMF [D] Remove: • Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) [A]: Lens cover ( x4) [B]: Right lens cover ( x3) [C]: Top right cover ( x1) [D]: Bracket ( x5) [E]: Scanner motor (Timing belt x1, x1, x1, x3) 3-28 B132R133.
PAGE 216
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR [E] [A] [B] [D] [C] B132R134A.WMF Remove: • ARDF ( 3.2.1) • Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) • Top rear, left, right covers ( 3.2.
PAGE 217
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB) [A] B132R133A.WMF Remove: • ARDF ( 3.2.1) • Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) • Top, rear, left, right covers ( 3.2.5) • Right stay, rear stay ( 3.3.5) • Lens cover ( 3.3.
PAGE 218
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE Scanner Wire Removal B132R137.WMF 1. Remove wire ground ( x1) 2. Disconnect the head of wire from tension bracket 1. 3. Remove spring . 4. Loosen the screw of tension bracket 1. 5. Disconnect the end of wire at 6. Remove lock bracket . of the 1st scanner ( x1). 7. Disconnect the wire from the pulley ( x1). 8. Remove the wire from the scanner.
PAGE 219
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment [D] [A] 4 5 [B] [C] B132R136.WMF 1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire on the pulley openings. 2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times. 3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times. 4. Attach tape [D] across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place.
PAGE 220
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT [D] [B] [C] [E] [A] B132R138.WMF 5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so the holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins [B] (x2). 6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so its holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins [D] (x2). 7. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner. 8. Tighten the screw of tension bracket ( Section 3.3.7). 9. Attach the pulley and tighten it lock screw ( Section 3.3.7). 10. Remove the positioning pins (x4). 11.
PAGE 221
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4 LASER UNIT WARNING • This laser unit employs two laser beams produced by a Class III LD with a wavelength of 648 to 660 nm and intensity of 7 mW. Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent blindness. • Before any performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, press the main power switch to power the machine off then unplug the machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few minutes.
PAGE 222
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR WARNING Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes. Important! • An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to the lens block unit. • Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands. • The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after you switch the machine off.
PAGE 223
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4.3 LASER UNIT [A] [B] [C] B132R101.WMF [E] B132R701.
PAGE 224
August, 2006 LASER UNIT [C] [A] [B] [D] [E] B132R001.WMF [F] Remove: [A]: Right plate ( x4) [B]: Left plate ( x4) [C]: Ground wire ( x1) [D]: Cross piece ( x4) [E]: Detach the support rod from the rubber clamps. Next, do the following: [F]: Raise the scanner unit. ( x 2) [G]: Set the support rod at the base then under the front, right corner of the scanner unit. 2 [G] 1 B132R002.WMF CAUTION The scanner unit is very heavy. Never remove the support rod during servicing.
PAGE 225
LASER UNIT August, 2006 [A] B132R003.WMF Remove: [A]: Laser unit ( x4, x6) NOTE: The laser unit includes four LD sub units. However, the LD sub units cannot be replaced separately because factory adjustment is required. Reinstallation • Make sure that the four tapes , , , are set correctly in the holes. • Be sure to reconnect the ground wire ([C] on the previous page).
PAGE 226
August, 2006 LASER UNIT Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement SP Adjustments [A] B132R904.WMF 1. SP codes are written on an A5 sheet provided with the laser unit. These SP codes must be done after the laser unit is replaced. • SP2154 001 (K) • SP2154 002 (M) • SP2154 003 (C) • SP2154 004 (Y) Only the settings shown with the first barcode [A] (2-Point Target) are necessary. The other information on the sheet can be ignored. NOTE: Enter the values printed on the A5 sheet.
PAGE 227
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR [A] [B] B132R004.WMF Remove: [A]: Laser unit ( 3.4.3) [B]: Laser synchronization detector ( x2, x1) NOTE: In the figure above, note the locations of the 8 laser synchronization detectors (shown within the circles).
PAGE 228
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT [D] [B] R [C] F [A] B132R220.WMF [A] B132R214.WMF 1. Spread some paper on a flat surface to hold developer that will be dumped from the development unit. 2. Remove the toner hopper and face plate. ( 3.2.7) 3. Remove the PCU stand [A] from bottom of the machine. 4. Remove the long special tool [B] and gear lock [C] from the bottom of the PCU stand. 5. Put the PCU stand [A] on a flat surface. 6.
PAGE 229
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 [D] [B] [A] [E] [C] B132R210.WMF 8. Remove the drum ( 3.5.4). Cover it with a sheet of A3/DLT paper to protect it from light. 9. Vacuum inside the PCU. NOTE: Do not vacuum around the brush roller (in the PCU cleaning unit) and around the drum potential sensor. 10. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] ( x 3). Important: • After you remove the shaft cap, never turn the shaft [C] of the development roller. 11.
PAGE 230
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) [E] [A] [C] [D] [B] B132I105.WMF 13. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B]. 14. With a fingernail release the tabs [C] on the left. 15. Hold the development unit steady with one hand [D] as you remove the old cartridge [E] from the development unit. Important: • The development unit is top heavy, and it tips easily. Be sure to steady it with one hand as you remove the old cartridge. • Discard the old cartridge.
PAGE 231
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 [A] [D] [C] [B] B132R219.WMF 16. At the rear of the development unit, attach the lock gear [A] to the development roller shaft. 17. At the front, attach the long special tool [B]. Important • The D-shaped hole of the long special tool [B] must fit over the D-shaped shaft tip [C]. 18.
PAGE 232
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) [C] [B] [A] B132R218.WMF 19. Place the development unit [A] inside the disposal bag [B] provided. [D] 20. Turn the development unit upsidedown, then rotate the lock gear [C] in the direction of the arrow to dump the developer/toner into the bag. Important • Rotate the lock gear in the direction indicated by the arrow. To avoid damaging the entrance seal, do not rotate the lock gear in the opposite direction. B132I105A.WMF 21.
PAGE 233
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 [C] [A] [B] [D] B132I106.WMF [F] [E] [G] B132I106A.WMF 24. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B]. 25. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are aligned. 26. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F]. 27. Press down on the left end [D] and right end [G] to lock the tabs.
PAGE 234
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) [A] [D] [C] [B] B132I106B.WMF [F] [E] B132I106C.WMF 28. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set properly. • Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked. • The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating away from the side of the development unit • Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not part from the development unit. 29. Attach the cartridge [E] ( x2).
PAGE 235
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 30. Re-install the development unit in the PCU. 31. Reattach the small and large plate at the front and rear. 32. Push the PCU fully into the slot to reinstall it. 33. To release the developer in the PCU, pull out the film seal [A]. NOTE: Place your other hand on the PCU [B] to steady it while you pull on the film seal. [A] [B] B132I101.WMF Reinstallation Important! YOU MUST DO SOME SPS, OR A FATAL ERROR WILL OCCUR. ( 3.5.
PAGE 236
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS [C] [A] [D] [B] Remove: • PCU ( 3.2.7) • Development unit ( 3.5.1) [A]: TD sensor connector ( x1; this is a tapping screw) [B]: Development gear cover ( x1) [C]: Development roller idle gear [D]: Development roller gear (C-ring x1) 3-49 B132R225.
PAGE 237
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT Remove: • PCU ( 3.2.7) [A]: Charge roller unit ( x2). This unit contains the charge roller and charge roller cleaning roller [A] B132R203.WMF [B]: Weight NOTE: The weight must be used during the full service life of the machine. Be sure to reinstall it. [C]: Lubricant bar [C] [B] B132R224.
PAGE 238
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE [A] [C] [D] [B] B132R205.WMF Removing the OPC Drum Remove: • PCU ( 3.2.7) • Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) [A]: Rear bracket ( x1) [B]: Front bracket ( x1) [C]: Rotate the cleaning unit to the right 90 degrees. [D]: OPC drum. Slide to the front to remove. Important • Set the removed OPC drum on a clean piece of paper and cover it to protect it from light. Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 239
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 [A] [B] B132R206.WMF Removing the Cleaning Blade Remove: • PCU ( 3.2.7) • Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) • Drum ( 3.5.4) • Open the upper cover of the cleaning unit 90 degrees to the right. [A]: Bracket [B]: Cleaning blade ( x2) Important • After you replace the cleaning blade, always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder B1329700. (For more, see the next page.) This must be done even if the drum is not replaced.
PAGE 240
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) Reinstallation of the drum To prevent scouring a new drum when the machine is turned on, coat the new drum [A] with Lubricant Powder (B1329700) before you install it. Important [A] • THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS MACHINE (e-STUDIO4500C/5500C). • NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS MACHINE, OR YOU WILL DAMAGE THE DRUM CHARGE ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.
PAGE 241
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT [G] [B] [D] [E] 1 2 [A] B132R208.WMF [C] [F] Remove: • PCU ( 3.2.7) • Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) • Drum ( 3.5.4) [A]: PCU joint [B]: Rear bracket ( x1) [C]: Long sleeve [D]: Leaf spring [E]: Short sleeve [F]: Bracket and 2 gears ( x1) [G]: Cleaning unit • When you remove the cleaning unit, the mylar can catch on the PCU frame and will scatter toner.
PAGE 242
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) [A] [B] NG B132R208C.WMF [C] OK NG B132R208B.WMF Reinstallation 1. Install the new cleaning unit [A] in the PCU. 2. Check the positions of the seals at the rear and front: • There must be no gap [B] between the edge of a seal and the edge of the cleaning blade. • There must be no overlap [C] at the edge of the seal and the edge of the cleaning blade. • Check that the cleaning blade does not catch on the edges of the seals as shown in the drawing at "OK".
PAGE 243
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.6 TD SENSOR [B] [A] B132R223.WMF Remove: • Open the front door. • Remove the PCU from the machine. ( 3.2.7) [A]: Connector bracket ( x1) [B]: TD sensor ( x2) Reinstallation After replacing the TD sensor: • Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced. ( 3.5.1) • Do SP3801 001 - 006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.
PAGE 244
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS AND DEVELOPER Do the following procedure after you replace the PCU, development, or any related parts. Pay attention to the combination of replaced parts in the table below (require procedures are different). Any SPs described in this table should be performed according to the steps below. 1. Open the front door, then turn on the main power. 2. After the "Open Cover" message is shown on the display, close the front door. 3.
PAGE 245
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 Important! ONLY INITIALIZE THE TD SENSOR ONE TIME. DO NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME. Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times: • At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure. • After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you replaced) • As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures. • If you do not obey these instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the machine.
PAGE 246
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING [A] [D] [C] [B] B132R215.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the STC holder front cover [A] ( x2) 3. Remove the STC bottom cover [B] (Pawls x2) 4. Wrap a clean cloth around the tip of a small screwdriver then scrape away any toner that has collected inside the bottom holder front cover. 5. Use a clean cloth to clean the bottom of the holder front cover [C] and the bottom of the holder [D].
PAGE 247
TONER SUPPLY UNIT August, 2006 3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB) [B] [A] B132R216.WMF Remove: • Open the front door. • Remove the toner hopper ( 3.2.7) [A]: Support bracket ( x2) [B]: CNB ( x8, x1). Slide the PCB assembly to the right and remove it.
PAGE 248
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.3 TONER PUMP [A] B132R217.WMF Remove: • Open the front door. • Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) • Support bracket ( 3.6.2) • Connector Board ( 3.6.2) [A]: Toner pump assembly ( x3, x3, Bushing x1, x1). Pull the assembly straight down and remove it.
PAGE 249
TONER SUPPLY UNIT August, 2006 3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR [A] B132R213.WMF Remove: • Open the front door. • Toner hopper ( 3.2.
PAGE 250
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.5 TONER HOPPER MOTOR [B] [A] B132R211.WMF Remove: • Open the front door. • Toner hopper ( 3.2.
PAGE 251
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR [B] [A] B132R615.WMF Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) [A]: Sensor bracket ( x1) [B]: Relay sensor ( x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 252
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR [B] [C] [D] [A] B132R616.WMF • Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) • Open the guide plate [A]. Remove: [B]: Sensor support plate ( x2) [C]: Double-feed detection sensor ( x1, x1) [D]: Registration sensor ( x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 253
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT [A] [C] [B] B132R302.WMF [D] B132R302A.WMF • Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) Remove: [A]: Paper transport unit cover ( x2) [B]: Timing belt, gear ( x1) NOTE: Do not loosen or remove the paint-locked screws. [C]: Press the release forward [D]: Raise the handle to the vertical position.
PAGE 254
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT [C] [D] [A] [F] [B] 2 [E] 1 B132R303.WMF Change the position of: [A]: Spring [B]: Spring Remove: [C]: Spring [D]: Connector ( x1) (use a pair of small pliers to remove the connector) [E]: Bracket ( x2) [F]: Paper transfer unit (PTR unit) • The handle should be up. • Raise the front . • Pull the rear Reinstallation • Be sure to set springs [A], [B], and [C] in their original positions before you reinstall the PTR unit.
PAGE 255
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, PAPER DISCHARGE PLATE [A] [B] [C] B132R304.WMF Remove: • Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) [A]: Paper discharge plate ( x2) [B]: Paper transfer roller ( x2, Gear x1, Shaft bearings x2) Reinstallation • When you install the roller, the long end [C] is at the rear. • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 256
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR [A] [B] B132R305.WMF Remove: • Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) [A]: Entrance guide plate ( x2) [B]: Lubrication bar ( x2) Important! Work carefully to avoid scratching the paper transfer roller. Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 257
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE [A] B132R306.WMF Remove: • Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) • Lubrication bar ( 3.7.5) [A]: Cleaning blade ( x2) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 258
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.7 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER [B] [A] [C] B132R307.WMF Remove: • Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) • Transfer exit guide, paper transfer roller ( 3.7.4) [A]: Gear ( x1) [B]: Brush roller cover ( x3) [C]: PTR cleaning brush roller (Gear x1, Washer x1, Shaft bearing x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 259
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, SEPARATION POWER PACK [C] [A] [D] [E] [B] B132R308.WMF B132R308A.WMF • Pull out the drawer unit ( 3.2.9) Remove: • Paper transport unit lever and cover ( 3.7.3) • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: Timing belt x1, Gear x1, Shaft bearing x1 Clip ring x1, Shaft bearing Paper transport belt ( x2, x2) Cover Separation power pack ( x6, x2) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 260
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR [C] [B] [D] [A] B132R618.WMF Remove: • Drawer unit ( 3.2.9) [A]: Drawer unit connector bracket ( x1, x3, x2) [B]: Gear cover ( x1) [C]: Registration gear ( x1, Spring pin x1) [D]: Registration motor assembly ( x3, x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 261
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED [A] [B] B132R619.WMF [D] [C] Remove: • Drawer unit ( 3.2.9) • Drawer unit connector bracket ( 3.7.9) • Registration motor assembly ( 3.7.9) • Sensor support plate ( 3.7.2) [A]: Upper stay ( x2, x1, Gear x 1, Pin x1) [B]: Lower stay ( x2, x1) [C]: Sensor bracket ( x2) [D]: Double-feed detection LED ( x1, x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-74 B132R620.
PAGE 262
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.1 ITB (Image Transfer Belt), BELT CLEANING UNIT [B] [C] [A] [D] B132R310.WMF Disassembly and ITB Replacement 1. Put a clean sheet of paper on a flat surface. 2. Remove the image transfer unit from the machine ( 3.2.8). Put the image transfer unit on the sheet of paper. NOTE: Keep the unit flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it, and put it down.
PAGE 263
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 [D] [B] [A] [C] [E] B132R314.WMF Remove: [A]: Encoder sensor bracket ( x1) [B]: Set the image transfer unit on its front side up. [C]: ID sensor / MUSIC sensor plate ( x2, x1) [D]: ITB Important • When you install the new ITB, the edge of the belt with the encoder film strip must be at [E]. The encoder must be at the rear side. • The encoder edge of the ITB is silver.
PAGE 264
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT Reassembly of the Image Transfer Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit [B] [A] B132R315.WMF [C] 1. Insert one sheet of A4/LT paper [A] at the corner as shown. NOTE: The paper protects the corner seal [B] of the belt cleaning unit. 2. Lower the belt unit [C] onto the cleaning unit [D]. 3. Push the belt unit and belt cleaning unit together. 4. Connect the belt unit and belt cleaning unit ( x1, x1). [D] B132R316.
PAGE 265
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT NG August, 2006 OK [A] B132R317.WMF 5. Pull out the paper [A] slowly. 6. Check the paper. If the paper is unmarked, go to the next step. -orIf the paper is creased or torn, separate the image transfer belt and cleaning unit. Inspect the seal. If the seal is damaged, replace it.
PAGE 266
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT Dusting the ITB with Lubricant Powder 1. Get a pack of Lubricant Powder B1329700. Important! • THE ITB MUST BE COATED WITH LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) BEFORE INSTALLING A NEW ITB. • THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS MACHINE (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). • NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS MACHINE, OR YOU MAY DAMAGE THE DRUM CHARGE ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.
PAGE 267
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 Important • Be sure to apply powder until the ITB is completely covered. B132R319.WMF • After covering the surface of the ITB with lubricant power, be sure to rotate the ITB through one full rotation in the opposite direction. This allows the cleaning blade edge [F] to be covered with sufficient lubricant powder. [F] Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-80 B132R320.
PAGE 268
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT [A] B132R311.WMF [C] [D] [B] OK NG B132R312A.WMF Remove: • Image transfer unit ( 3.2.8) • Belt cleaning unit ( 3.8.1) [A]: ITB cleaning blade ( x2) [B]: Dust collection unit ( x3) Reinstallation • After reinstallation of the dust collection unit, confirm that the seal [C] is covered by the bracket [D]. • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 269
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE [A] [C] [B] [D] B132R313.WMF Remove: • Image transfer unit, ITB cleaning unit ( 3.8.1) • ITB cleaning blade, dust collection unit ( 3.8.2) [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Rear bracket, coupling ( x1) Front bracket ( x1, Gear x1) ITB cleaning roller ITB cleaning scraper blade ( x2) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 270
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS [A] [B] B132R332.WMF Remove the ID sensor/music sensor plate ( 3.8.1) [A]: Cover ( x2) [B]: Music and ID sensors ( x4, x1) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 271
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK [D] [B] [C] 1 2 2 B132R333.WMF [A] • Remove the ITB ( 3.8.1) [A]: Support bracket ( x1) [B]: Small idle roller plate [C]: Large idle roller plate [D]: Image transfer power pack ( x6, x6) Reinstallation • Connect the color coded connectors at the correction positions. Red Blue Yellow • When you reattach the support bracket [A] rotate the screw [E] up as shown, then tighten it.
PAGE 272
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS [A] B132R335.WMF • Remove the ITB ( 3.8.1) [A]: Belt position sensor assembly ( x3, x2) Reinstallation • Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
PAGE 273
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9 FUSING UNIT 3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS [B] [C] [A] B132R403.WMF [D] B132R402.WMF Pull out the drawer unit ( 3.2.9) [A]: Raise lever until it stops. [B]: Fusing cleaning unit cover ( x2) [C]: Fusing unit exit guide ( x2) [D]: Hot roller stripper • Press the sides in to disconnect the strippers and remove.
PAGE 274
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.2 FUSING UNIT [D] [C] [A] [B] B132R401.WMF 1. Turn the copier OFF and disconnect the power cord at the power source. 2. Open the front door. 3. Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) 4. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes. 5. Loosen the fusing unit screw [A] ( x1) 6. Grip the fusing unit at [B] and [C] and lift the unit to remove it. Important • Do not touch the reference pin [D] when lifting the fusing unit.
PAGE 275
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR [B] [C] B132R405.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.
PAGE 276
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR [B] [A] B132R407.WMF [C] Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Lower entrance guide cover ( x2) [B]: Pressure roller thermostats ( x4) [C]: Pressure roller thermistor ( x1, x1) 3-89 B132R410.
PAGE 277
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT [A] [B] B132R408.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.
PAGE 278
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS [A] [B] B132R411.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) [A]: Two left thermostats ( x4) [B]: Two right thermostats ( x4) NOTE: The thermostats, installed in line with one another, are of two types. One is marked with a red mark, but their order of installation is not important.
PAGE 279
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR [E] [F] [B] [D] [A] [C] B132R409.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) [A]: Fusing unit belt cover ( x2) [B]: Hot roller thermistor ( x1) [C]: Heating roller thermistor ( x1) [D]: Heating roller temperature sensor ( x2, Spring plates x2) [E]: Wire ( x1) [F]: Connector leads. Pull through the frame.
PAGE 280
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER [C] [A] [B] B132R404.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) 1. Remove the fusing belt lubrication roller [A] (Springs x 2, Bushing x2, x2). 2. Remove the cleaning roller [B]. NOTE: Press on each end of the roller to release the springs [C]. Reinstallation • When you install the fusing belt lubrication roller, the end with the serial number must be toward the rear of the machine.
PAGE 281
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER [A] B132R406.WMF [B] [D] [C] [E] Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.
PAGE 282
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT [H] [G] [H] [I] [F] [I] Remove: [E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy [F]: Cleaning felt roller [G]: Bracket [H]: Springs [I]: Bushings 3-95 [E]
PAGE 283
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS [B] [C] B132R413.WMF [A] Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.
PAGE 284
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT [C] [A] [D] [B] B132R414.WMF Important! Before disconnecting the lamps, mark the connectors to ensure that you match their connection points correctly at reinstallation.
PAGE 285
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP [B] [A] [C] B132R412.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) • Brackets ( 3.9.
PAGE 286
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER [A] B132R415.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) • Hot roller fusing lamp, heating roller fusing lamp (x3) ( 3.9.10) [A]: Release levers. Press down to release.
PAGE 287
FUSING UNIT [A] August, 2006 [K] [J] [D] [L] [I] [M] [E] [K] [J] [F] [G] [B] [I] [G] [E] [C] [H] [F] B132R416.WMF 1. Remove screws [A], [B], [C] ( x3). 2. Rotate the frame [D] to the right. 3. At the front and rear of the heating roller, remove: [E] Lock rings [F] Bushings [G] Bearings 4. Remove the heating roller [H] 5. At the front and rear of the hot roller, remove: [I] Lock rings [J] Shaft bearings [K] Gears 6. Remove the fusing belt [L] and hot roller [M].
PAGE 288
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT [K] [J] [D] [L] [M] [K] [I] [A] [E] [F] [J] [B] [I] [G] [O] [C] [H] [G] [F] [E] [N] Assembling procedure: • Attach the fusing belt [L] and hot roller [M]. • Attach the lock rings [I], shaft bearings [J] and gears [K] to the front and rear of the heating roller. NOTE: Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside. • Attach the heating roller [H] (Length [N] > [O]).
PAGE 289
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER [F] [A] [C] [D] [B] [E] [B] B132R417.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.15) • Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) • Pressure roller fusing lamp (x1) ( 3.9.11) [A]: Lower fusing entrance guide ( x2) [B]: Front screw ( x2) [C]: Rear screw ( x1) [D]: Hot roller fusing lamp ( x1), heating roller fusing lamps ( x2) [E]: Rotate the frame to the right, in the direction shown by the arrow. [F]: Pressure roller.
PAGE 290
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER [A] B132R418.WMF Remove: • Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) • Lower exit guide assembly ( 3.9.
PAGE 291
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR [A] B132R500.WMF [B] • Pull out the duplex unit. [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( x3) [B]: Duplex inverter motor ( x3, x1, Timing belt x1, Gear x1) 3-104 B132R504.
PAGE 292
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR [A] B132R506.WMF • Pull out the duplex unit. • Release the lower guide plate with knob F. Remove: • Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.
PAGE 293
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS Duplex Entrance Sensor [A] [C] [B] B132R502.WMF • Pull out the duplex unit. Remove: [A]: Bracket ( x 2) [B]: Release harness clamp [C]: Duplex entrance sensor ( x 1) Reinstallation • Insert the anti-static brushes into the roller holes.
PAGE 294
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Transport Sensor 1, 2, Inverter Exit Sensor [A] [B] [D] [C] B132R503.WMF Remove the duplex unit ( 3.2.
PAGE 295
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 [F] [A] [B] [C] [F] [D] [E] B132R507.WMF [A]: Jogger fences ( x 1 ea.) [B]: Left transport cover ( x 2) • The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching. • To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
PAGE 296
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Transport Sensor 3 [B] [C] [A] [D] B132R508.WMF Remove: [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.1) [B]: Cross stay ( x 1) [C]: Right transport cover ( x 2, x 1) NOTE: The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching.
PAGE 297
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR [A] B132R505.WMF Remove: [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.
PAGE 298
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT [B] [A] B140R819.WMF Remove: • Remove the inverter unit ( 3.10.3) • Cross stay ( 3.10.3) • Reverse trigger roller assembly ( 3.10.3) • Jogger fences ( 3.10.3) • Left transport cover ( 3.10.3) • Duplex jogger motor ( 3.10.4). 1. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and tighten the screw [A]. 2.
PAGE 299
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY [C] [A] [B] B140R820.WMF [D] B140R821.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right [C] sides of the tandem tray. 3. Remove the left tandem tray [D] ( x 5).
PAGE 300
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) [A] [B] [B] [D] B140R822.WMF [C] [E] B140R823.WMF [A]: Right tandem tray ( x 2). NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B] ride on the slide rail [C]. 2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.
PAGE 301
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT [A] B132R623.WMF • Pull out the tandem feed tray. [A]: Return sensor assembly ( x 1, x1).
PAGE 302
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT [A] [D] [C] [B] B140R825.WMF • Pull out the tandem feed tray. [A]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1). [B]: Back fence transport gear ( x 1) [C]: Move the back fence to the right.
PAGE 303
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT [B] [A] [C] B140R826.WMF [D] [E] B140R827.WMF Remove the right tandem tray ( 3.11.
PAGE 304
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire. [A] [C] B140R828.WMF [F] [E] [D] [B] Remove the right tandem tray. ( 3.11.11) [A]: Remove the inner cover ( x 2) ( 3.11.14) [B]: Wire stoppers • Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook.
PAGE 305
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 [E] [D] [B] [A] [C] B140R830.WMF NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire: 1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in the hole [D]. 2) Position the wire as shown [E]. 3) Do not cross the wires.
PAGE 306
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be used for tandem feed. [B] [D] B140R832.WMF [A] [C] B140R831.WMF 1. Open the front cover. 2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray [B] from the left tandem tray. Right Tray 3. Remove the inner cover [C] ( x 2). 4. Re-position the side fences [D] ( x 1 each).
PAGE 307
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 [B] [C] [D] [A] B132R624.WMF B140R834.WMF Left Tray 6. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 2). 7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] ( x 5). 8. Remove the rear side fence [C] and front side fence [D] ( x 4 ea.) 9. Re-position the side fences ( x 4 ea.). A4: Outer slot position LT: Inner slot position 10. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.
PAGE 308
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) [A] A4 LT [B] B132R836.WMF [C] 11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). • For A4 set the screw in the left hole [B]. • For LT set the screw in the right hole [C]. 12. Input the new paper size into SP5959 001. Reinstallation • Do the scanner and registration adjustments (see section 3.19.1, 3.19.3).
PAGE 309
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.1 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLERS [A] [C] [B] [D] B132R601.WMF [A]: Remove the tray. [B]: Feed roller ( x 1) [C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1) [D]: Separation roller ( x 1) Important • The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), bypass tray, and ARDF are similar. However, the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal tray rollers (Trays 1, 2, 3).
PAGE 310
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.2 FEED UNIT [C] [A] [B] B132R602A.WMF B132R603A.WMF Remove: • Front door ( 3.2.4) • If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. • LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover Pull out all three trays (do not remove). [A]: Toner collection bottle [B]: Vertical transport guide [C]: Inner cover ( x 2) NOTE: When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover then insert from it.
PAGE 311
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 [B] [A] B132R625.WMF B132R604.WMF [A]: Guide plate ( x 1) • 1st feed unit only. [B]: Feed unit ( x 1, x 3) • Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward. NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it carefully and slowly. Important: If the paper feed motor must be replaced, replace the feed unit.
PAGE 312
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done: • When feeding special paper, especially thick paper • When the customer is experiencing feed problems [A] [B] B132R605.WMF 1. Remove the feed unit ( 3.12.2) 2. Loosen the hex screw [A]. 3.
PAGE 313
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS [A] [B] [C] [D] Remove: • Feed unit ( 3.12.2) [A]: Sensor bracket ( x1) [B]: Paper end sensor ( x1) [C]: Tray lift sensor ( x1) [D]: Sensor bracket ( x1) [E]: Paper feed sensor ( x1) B132R606.
PAGE 314
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR [B] [A] [C] B132R607.WMF Remove: • Feed unit ( 3.12.
PAGE 315
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.1 BYPASS PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER [B] [A] [C] B132R601A.WMF • Remove right covers ( 3.2.5) • Open the bypass tray • Remove the bypass unit ( 3.13.3) • Remove the upper unit cover ( 3.13.
PAGE 316
August, 2006 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES [B] [C] [A] B132R610.WMF [E] • Remove right covers ( 3.2.5) • Open the bypass tray Disconnect: [A]: Front hinge [B]: Rear hinge Remove: [C]: Bypass tray ( x1) [D]: Bypass table ( x2, Pawls x2) [E]: Paper size detection board (Pawl x1, x1) [D] B132R611.
PAGE 317
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT [A] B132R626.WMF • Remove right covers ( 3.2.
PAGE 318
August, 2006 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR [A] [B] [C] Remove: • Bypass unit ( 3.13.3) [A]: Unit upper cover (Release x1) [B]: Bypass paper end sensor ( x1) [C]: Feed sensor ( x1, x1) 3-131 B132R613.
PAGE 319
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH [A] [B] [C] B132R614.WMF Remove: • Bypass unit ( 3.13.3) [A]: Bypass feed clutch ( x1, x1) Reinstallation • Make sure the arm [B] fits correctly into the notch bracket [C] of the clutch.
PAGE 320
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14 BOARDS 3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT [A] [B] B132R710.WMF CAUTION Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
PAGE 321
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM [A] [B] [C] [D] B132R712.WMF B132R711.WMF Important: • If you are going to replace the NVRAM, follow the procedure on the next page and refer to these illustrations as necessary. • Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded is contents. (For more, see the procedures on the following page.) • Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you touch the controller board.
PAGE 322
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT Upload NVRAM Data Æ SD Card 1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report. 2. Turn the copier main power switch off. 3. Insert an SD card in Slot 3 4. Execute SP5824 to upload the data to the SD card. 5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord. Replace NVRAM 1. Remove the NVRAM ( 3.14.2). 2. Install the new NVRAM. Restore NVRAM Data to the New NVRAM 1. Turn the copier main power switch off. 2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into Slot 3. 3.
PAGE 323
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB 1 2 [A] B132R706.WMF Remove: • Rear covers ( 3.2.6) [A]: Controller box cover ( x17) [B]: IOB ( x20, x9) [C]: BICU ( x11, x9) [C] [B] B132R714.
PAGE 324
August, 2006 BOARDS NOTE: When you replace the BICU, make sure that the DIP switches are set to the correct positions. • 120V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #1 is ON. • 220/230/240V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #2 is ON. Example: A 220/230/240V machine (only DIP SW #2 is ON, the others are OFF).
PAGE 325
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.5 RDS BOARD, JUMPER [A] [B] B132R709.WMF Remove: • Controller unit ( 3.14.1) • Interface board ( 3.14.
PAGE 326
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD [B] [A] B132R708.WMF B132R713.WMF 1. Remove the controller unit. ( 3.14.4) 2. Remove the RAPI EXT board [A] ( x4) 3. Remove the HDD. ( 3.15) 4.
PAGE 327
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD [A] [C] [B] B132R720.WMF • Remove the rear lower cover ( 3.2.
PAGE 328
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.8 PSU [A] B132R722.WMF • Remove the rear covers ( 3.2.6) Remove: • HVPS, PFC board assembly ( 3.14.
PAGE 329
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD [A] B132R727.WMF • Remove left lower cover. ( 3.2.
PAGE 330
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS [A] [B] [D] [C] B132R716.WMF • Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.
PAGE 331
HDD UNIT August, 2006 3.15 HDD UNIT [A] B132R707.WMF Important • The HDD unit contains four separate hard disks. However, the four disks are always replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk. Remove: • Rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Controller box cover ( 3.14.4) [A]: HDD unit ( x8, x4) Important • Mark the harness connectors before you disconnect them. They must be reconnected at their connection points. 1. Reassemble the machine. 2.
PAGE 332
August, 2006 HDD UNIT Disposal of HDD Units • Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client. • If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping. • The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
PAGE 333
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16 MOTORS 3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR [B] [A] B132I718A.WMF 1. Remove the rear covers. ( 3.2.6) 2. Open and lock the controller box. ( 3.2.11) 3. Remove the PCU stand [A] stored under the machine. 4. Remove the drum motor shaft tool [B] (shorter tool) from the bottom of the PCU stand.
PAGE 334
August, 2006 MOTORS [A] [D] [E] [C] [B] [F] B132R724.WMF 5. Remove the PCU motor [A] ( x1, x4). 6. Open the front door. 7. Remove the toner hopper. ( 3.2.7) Important: Make sure the toner hopper slide rails are pushed into the machine. 8. At the front of the machine, attach the short tool [B] to the shaft of the drum motor to be removed. 9. Rotate the short tool in the direction of the embossed arrow [C] on the short tool (counter-clockwise) until the holes are aligned.
PAGE 335
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR [A] B132R717.WMF • Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open and lock controller box ( 3.2.
PAGE 336
August, 2006 MOTORS 3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR [A] B132R718.WMF • Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open and lock controller box ( 3.2.11) • Remove the image transfer board assembly ( 3.14.
PAGE 337
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.4 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR, WASTE TONER DISTRIBUTION MOTOR [A] [C] B132R721.WMF [B] • Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.11) • Remove the HVPS and PFC board assembly ( 3.14.
PAGE 338
August, 2006 MOTORS 3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 1, 2, 3) [A] [B] [C] B132R723A.WMF • Remove the rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open the controller box and lock it ( 3.2.11) • Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly ( 3.14.7) • Remove PSU ( 3.14.8) Tray 1 [A]: Bracket ( x1) [B]: Bottom plate lift motor – Tray 1 ( x3, x1) Trays 2, 3 • Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly ( 3.14.7) • Remove PSU ( 3.14.
PAGE 339
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR [B] [A] B132R719A.WMF B132R725.WMF • Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) • Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.11) • Remove the Transfer board assembly ( 3.14.
PAGE 340
August, 2006 AIR FILTERS 3.17 AIR FILTERS 3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER [A] B132R212.WMF Remove: • Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) • Motor cover ( 3.6.
PAGE 341
AIR FILTERS August, 2006 3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, DUST FILTERS [A] [D] [B] [C] B132R729.WMF Remove: [A]: Cover ( x1) [B]: Inner cover [C]: Dust filters x3 [D]: Ozone filter Reinstallation • Make sure you install the filters as shown. If you do not, you cannot reattach the cover [B].
PAGE 342
August, 2006 AIR FILTERS 3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER [A] [B] B132R730.
PAGE 343
ARDF August, 2006 3.18 ARDF 3.18.1 ARDF COVERS [A] [C] [B] B132R104.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Front cover ( x 3, Tabs x4). Press down the tabs. [C]: Rear cover ( x 2, Tabs x2). Press down the tabs.
PAGE 344
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT [C] [B] [A] [D] B132R105.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Open the feed cover. Remove the snap fitting. Pull toward you slightly to disconnect the rear end of the shaft Disconnect the front end of the shaft.
PAGE 345
ARDF August, 2006 [B] 3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICK-UP ROLLER Remove: • Original Feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: E-ring [B]: Cover [C]: Slide bushings out [A] [D] Reassembly Make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick-up roller unit [D]. [C] B132R106.WMF [E]: Feed belt holder [F]: Feed belt NOTE: Remove slowly. Do not let the springs , fall. [E] [F] B132R107.WMF [G]: ARDF pick-up roller [G] B132R106A.
PAGE 346
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR [B] [C] [A] B132R117.WMF Remove: • Remove front cover ( 3.18.1) • Original feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: Pin screw x1 [B]: Raise the bottom plate [C]: Bottom plate position sensor ( x1).
PAGE 347
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW CORRECTION, SEPARATION SENSORS [A] [B] [C] B132R110.WMF [D] [E] [F] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: [G]: Open the feed cover. Guide plate ( x 3). Width sensor bracket ( x 2) Original width sensors ( x 5) Interval sensor ( x 1) Skew correction sensor ( x 1) Separation sensor ( x 1) [G] B132R111.
PAGE 348
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS [A] B132R109A.WMF Remove: • Front, rear covers ( 3.18.1) • Clip rings ( x2). [C] [A]: Remove the original tray [B]: Lower cover ( x4) [C]: Original length sensors: B5 original length ( x1) A4 original length ( x1) LG original length ( x1) [B] 3-161 B132R109B.
PAGE 349
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.7 FEED COVER, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE, PICK-UP ROLLER HP, UPPER INVERTER SENSORS [A] [B] B132R116.WMF Remove: • Front, rear covers ( 3.18.
PAGE 350
August, 2006 ARDF [D] [C] [E] [B] [A] B132R118.
PAGE 351
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR [A] [B] [C] [D] [A]: Raise the ARDF to the vertical position. Remove: [B]: APS bracket ( x1) [C]: ARDF position sensor ( x1, x1) [D]: APS start sensor ( x1, x1) 3-164 B132R125.
PAGE 352
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS [B] [A] B132R112.WMF • Remove the front and rear covers ( 3.18.1) • Remove the original feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: Rotate the inverter guide 180 degrees. [B]: Original guide plate ( x4).
PAGE 353
ARDF August, 2006 [A] [B] B132R113.WMF [C] [D] Remove: [A]: Bracket ( x1) [B]: Original registration sensor ( x1) [C]: Bracket ( x1) [D]: Original exit sensor ( x1) B132R115.
PAGE 354
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER [A] [C] [B] B132R108.WMF • Open the feed cover • Remove the original feed unit. ( 3.18.2) Remove: [A]: Separation roller cover. Use the tip of a small flathead screwdriver.
PAGE 355
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly [A] [B] [C] [D] B132R102.WMF [E] [F] B132R126.WMF 1. Open the feed cover. ( 3.18.1) 2. Remove the ARDF front cover. ( 3.18.1) 3. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position. 4. Pull off the white cover [B] (Velcro fasteners) 5. Release the stopper pin [C] of the transport guide [D]. 6.
PAGE 356
August, 2006 ARDF Removing the Belt [B] [D] [A] [E] [C] B132R127.WMF 1. Remove the front plastic cover [A] ( x1) 2. Remove the rear plastic cover [B] ( x1) 3. Loosen front lock screw [C]. Do not remove. 4. Loosen rear lock screw [D]. Do not remove. This releases the spring-loaded tension on the belt. 5. Grip the roller in the center [E] then squeeze the belt to bring the rollers together. 6. While squeezing the belt and rollers together in the center, tighten screws [C] and [D].
PAGE 357
ARDF August, 2006 [A] [B] [E] [C] [F] [D] [G] B132R139.WMF 8. Remove the Teflon sleeve [A]. 9. Push the rear shaft bearing [B] out of its bracket. 10. Push the front shaft bearing [C] out of its bracket. 11. Push the front end of the shaft [D] over the top of the bracket. 12. Push the rear end of the shaft [E] over the top of the bracket. 13. Pull the shaft [F] out of the belt. 14. Pull the belt [G] toward the front to remove it. [H] 15. Slide the new belt over the assembly. 16.
PAGE 358
August, 2006 ARDF Reinstalling the Belt [B] 1. Remove the ARDF front cover [A] ( 3.18.1) 2. Take out the special tool [B]. ( x1) NOTE: The special tool [B] is attached to the front side plate. It is used to adjust the tension on the belt on both ends of the shaft. [A] B132R104A.WMF FRONT [D] REAR [E] [C] B132R140.WMF 3. Fit the special tool onto the FRONT. 4. Slowly loosen the front lock screw [C] until you see the tip of the shaft aligned with the hole , then tighten the screw.
PAGE 359
ARDF August, 2006 [B] [A] B132R103.WMF Reattaching the White Cover 1. With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass. 2. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass. 3. Close the ARDF [B] on top of the cover.
PAGE 360
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD [A] B132R124.WMF Remove: • ARDF Rear cover ( 3.18.
PAGE 361
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR [A] B132R121.WMF • Open the feed cover. Remove: • ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.
PAGE 362
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR [A] [C] [B] B132R123.WMF [D] [E] • Open the feed cover • Remove the ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.1) Important! The feed motor must be removed before the transport motor.
PAGE 363
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.15 ARDF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR [A] B132R120.WMF • Open the feed cover. Remove: • ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.
PAGE 364
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.1 SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration, side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use a C-4 test chart to perform the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification 1. Place the test chart (C-4) on the exposure glass and make a copy. 2. Check the magnification ratio. 3. Use SP4008 (Sub Scan Mag) to adjust if necessary. Standard: ±1.0%. A B146R962.
PAGE 365
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Main scan dot position correction Adjust the printer registration before adjusting the scanner. 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Open SP4010 and SP4011. 3. Make sure that each value is equal to the factory default. 4. Press [COPY Window] and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo mode. NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. Color displacement cannot be checked correctly in text mode. 5. Use a magnification scope to check the yellow and cyan vertical lines.
PAGE 366
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.2 ARDF ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration A B A: Leading edge registration B: Side-to-side registration B146R964.WMF B146R965.WMF Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper. 1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF table and make a copy. 2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
PAGE 367
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 3.19.3 REGISTRATION Image Area The image area must be configured correctly. Adjust the registration within the adjustment standard range as described below. B Feed direction A Image Area C A = B = C = 4.2 mm (1.6") B146R966.WMF Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed. Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station.
PAGE 368
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter SP mode and open SP2109. 2. Print Pattern 10. NOTE: Print several printing patterns and average the measured values of the leading edge and side-to-side registration values. 3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment. • Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1001. • Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed). • Input the value and press the [#] key.
PAGE 369
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION Forced MUSIC Adjustment The line position adjustment optimizes the quality of color prints.
PAGE 370
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT To Print the Trim Pattern: 1. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern – Select Pattern) and select pattern 10. 2. Press the [Execute] on the display. 3. Press the [Copy Screen] on the display to switch to the normal copier screen. 4. Select the paper size and color then press the [Start] key to print the pattern. 5. Press the [SP Screen]. 6. Do SP2109 002 and select pattern 0 and press the [Execute] button. 7.
PAGE 371
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Boss-1 Boss-2 Laser Unit (Top View) Rear A Left Right B Front Laser Unit (Front View) Top Left Right LE: Leading Edge TE: Trailing Edge LE Bottom LE TE LE TE TE Correct Pattern [1] [2] Paper feed direction B132R902.WMF To Adjust the Pattern Output: 1. Remove the exposure glass. ( 3.3.1) 2. Remove the lens cover and lens block. ( 3.3.2) 3. Loosen the screws of the laser unit , , , ( x4). 4.
PAGE 372
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ACC adjustment done at installation is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance for optimum performance. Printer gamma correction is required for fine adjustment to meet a customer requirement. The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified with SP modes. The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and ID max can be adjusted. The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
PAGE 373
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Adjustment Procedure 1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you want to adjust. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Press “Copy SP.” 4. Open SP4918 009. 5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. (Refer the tables below.) Important • Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).
PAGE 374
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS - Photo Mode, Single Color Step 1 Item to Adjust ID max: (K) 2 Middle (Middle ID) (K) 3 Shadow (High ID) (K) Level on the C-4 chart Highlight (Low ID) (K) 4 Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
PAGE 375
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 - Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color Step 1 Item to Adjust ID max: (K) 2 Middle (Middle ID) (K) 3 Shadow (High ID) (K) Level on the C-4 chart (K) Highlight (Low ID) (K) 4 Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
PAGE 376
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes.
PAGE 377
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The tables show the level of the color scale on the C-4 test chart and on the tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C-4 chart.
PAGE 378
August, 2006 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION After clearing memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working correctly, calibrate the touch screen. Important • Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only. • To avoid causing an error, do not touch the Reset key while doing this procedure. 1. Press [Clear] ( , press 1993 press, and then press [Clear/Stop] ( ) 5 times. B140R892.WMF 2.
PAGE 379
April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4. TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4.1.1 OVERVIEW Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software: • If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with the program software only partially downloaded. • When download processing execution starts, “Downloading…” is displayed and when downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
PAGE 380
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD April, 2007 4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES 01 02 Display Reboot after SD card insert E01 Module ID Card No. xx/xx Download Error E02 Power OFF/ON Details Controller ROM update error 1 When the update break data is stored in NVRAM, the break module information and the decompression module capable of writing do not match. Controller ROM update error 2. Error occurs during ROM update program initialization. Controller ROM update error 3 The ROM for the write operation does not exist.
PAGE 381
April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD Display Download Error E22 Module ID Card No xx/xx Details System error 3 (+SC991) Data fails to decompress. Card defective. SC991 System error 4 23 Download Error E24 Power Off/On System error 5 Card read/write error. Software or card defective. 30 No Valid Data E30 31 Reboot After Card Insert E31 Module ID Card No. xx/xx Reboot After Card Insert E32 Module ID Card No. xx/xx Download dysfunction 1 Print download is not possible.
PAGE 382
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 42 43 44 Display Download Error E42 Module ID Card No. xx/xx Download Error E43 Module ID Card No. xx/xx Download Error E44 Module ID Card No. 50 No Valid Data E50 51 (no display) 52 (no display) 53 (no display) April, 2007 Details Download result failure 3 Operation panel or language download failed. For this error, sometimes the message may not be displayed. Download result failure 4 Print download failed.
PAGE 383
April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES Here is a list of important SP codes that you may need during troubleshooting. SP5802 Free Run Mode SP5803 Input Check SP5804 Output Check SP5810 Cancel Fusing SC Code SP5990 SMC Printout SP7401 SP7403 SC Codes SC History SP7801 ROM Ver SP7832 Self-Diagnostic Report Details Execute this SP to force base engine to run in the free run mode for testing. Displays the signals received from sensors and switches.
PAGE 384
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS After SP2181 030 executes normally, you should see: 1 If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error. Code 0 1 2 12 Error None None Failure Abnormal detection pattern Problem Large amount of skew. Large amount of K skew. Large amount of skew in every color. Density too light. ITB scratched. ITB misaligned. SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF). Image density too light. Dirty, abnormal images.
PAGE 385
April, 2007 Code 21-23 Error Auto density out of range (over or lower) 31-33 Amount of skew calculated in the coverage pattern abnormal. 41-43 Intersecting lines of the grid pattern. SPECIAL PROCEDURES Problem Reinstall ITB. Image density too light, uneven. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1. Check the images. Check the ID sensor and its connection. Connector loose. Connector dirty. Harness defective. Other ITB misaligned SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF). Large amount of K skew.
PAGE 386
SPECIAL PROCEDURES Code 61 Error Time out of detecting MUSIC pattern. April, 2007 Problem ITB misaligned SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF). Recovery Reinstall ITB. Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON). The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from the default setting, which is 2050. (These settings are done with SP2153 020~022.) Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and check the images. Check the ID sensor and its connection. Dirty, abnormal images. Connector loose. Connector dirty. Harness defective.
PAGE 387
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Image Position Adjustment A MUSIC error occurs when a large amount of skew occurs beyond the acceptable range, or when the K sensor is out of position. Such errors can be corrected manually to correct skew. However, these adjustments cannot correct problems caused by physical damage to the ITB, filming, density degradation, or a dirty sensor. 1. Load some A3/DLT paper in Tray 1. Make sure that the side and bottom fences are set properly. 2.
PAGE 388
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT Color Registration Error Correction 1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button. 2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the “Start” button to print the pattern. NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you push the Start button. Paper Feed Direction B132R930.
PAGE 389
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4. Correct the errors in the vertical lines (this corrects errors in the main scan direction). See the following table for how to do this. NOTE: In the table, a dotted line indicates a colored line (C, M, or Y). For example, the first row of the table shows you how to adjust the machine if a colored line is to the right of the black line on the test pattern. SP Action Decrease the value 2101 002 (M) 2101 003 (C) 2101 004 (Y) Unit of adjustment: One dot (43.
PAGE 390
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 Color Skew Error Correction 1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button. 2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the “Start” button to print the pattern. NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you push the Start button. Paper Feed Direction B132R931.WMF In the example above, the dotted lines are magenta, cyan, or yellow, and the solid lines are black. 3. Correct the skew.
PAGE 391
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Overall Check 1. After you do the color registration error and color skew corrections, do a forced MUSIC again, with SP 2111 001. 2. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper again. Check the skew and color registration. If they are still not acceptable, do the forced MUSIC again. 3. Do SP 2181-030 to make sure that the forced MUSIC was done correctly. If the result is ‘1’, then each color was aligned correctly.
PAGE 392
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 B132R942.WMF When viewed through the lupe, the grid lines on the left and right side should be perfectly aligned (Good) and not misaligned (No-Good). 4. If the lines are misaligned (No-Good), use the lupe to measure distance between the black vertical lines and each of the colored vertical lines (C, M, Y). Measure this on the left and right folds: If there is a gap between the black lines and a colored line, measure it and correct it with SPs as shown in the tables below.
PAGE 393
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DevSetup Execute) ERRORS After SP3812 001 executes normally, you should see four 1s: 1111 Reading from left to right, each "1" indicates the status of the PCUs: K, M, C, Y. If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error. SP3812 001 Error Codes Code 2 Error Execution Interrupted Problem Door was opened, or another color returned an error. Execution halts at the first error encountered or if the front door is opened during execution.
PAGE 394
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING Summary of Process Control SC Codes This is a list of SC codes that may occur during process control. For more, please refer to the process control tables on the following pages. Pre-Processing Check SC316 to SC319 Vpp is not within the normal range (Vpp: the AC current applied to the charge roller to compensate for changes in the ambient temperature and humidity).
PAGE 395
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Process Control Self-Check: SP3821 After the process control self-check is executed manually with SP3820, you can execute SP3821 to check the results of the self-check. The possible error codes are listed in the "Displayed Code" column in the table below. When you do SP3821, the normal display (no errors) will look like this: 10101010 Reading from left to right each "10" represents a color: K, M, C, Y.
PAGE 396
SPECIAL PROCEDURES General Normal Potential Sensors ID Sensors Displayed Code 10 15 April, 2007 Item Major Cause Action Successful VdHome Error 1 --V0 (SP3571) above –700V, or VdHome (SP3572) above –700V. • The window of the potential sensor probe fouled with toner • Potential sensor damaged 16 VdHome Error 2 V0 (SP3571) below –700V, or VdHome (SP3772) below –500V.
PAGE 397
April, 2007 General AC Charge SPECIAL PROCEDURES Displayed Code 23 Item ID Sensor Output Error 31 AC Charge Adjust Error 1 32 AC Charge Adjust Error 2 Major Cause Action Vsg_reg (SP3121) less than 0.5V. • ID sensor harness loose, disconnected, damaged • ID sensor damaged Note: Vsg_reg refers to the reading of the drum surface done with the direct reflection sensors in both the color and black ID sensors. Vpp could not be adjusted after 20 attempts.
PAGE 398
SPECIAL PROCEDURES General ID Sensor Pattern Detection Displayed Code 55 April, 2007 Item Development Gamma Error 1 Major Cause Action Development gamma (SP3561) 2 greater than 6.0 (mg/cm /-kV). 4-20 • Switch the machine OFF and ON then do SP3820 002. • Do SP3561 005 to 008 to confirm that development gamma is within the target range (-0.15 to +0.25) • If not within the target range, do the procedure again.
PAGE 399
April, 2007 General SPECIAL PROCEDURES Displayed Code 56 Item Major Cause Action Development Gamma Error 2 Development gamma (SP3561) 2 less than 0.3 (mg/cm /-kV) • Toner supply abnormal • Image transfer power pack defective • Toner shield glass dirty 57 Vk Error 1 58 Vk Error 2 59 Insufficient Active Data Vk (development start voltage) greater than 150V. Vk (development start voltage) less than –150V. Not enough active data to calculate development gamma (only "0" or "1"). 4-21 1.
PAGE 400
SPECIAL PROCEDURES General Potential Adjustment Abnormal End Displayed Code 61 April, 2007 Item Major Cause Action LD Failure A laser diode failed to fire and write the ID sensor pattern. • Toner shield glass dirty • PCU set incorrectly • Laser diode defective 62 Vr Error 63 Vd Adjust Error 64 Vpl Adjust Error 90 Potential Adjust Error Forced Termination Vr (residual voltage) greater than –200V. • Drum deteriorated • Toner shield glass dirty Vd could not be adjusted within ±10V.
PAGE 401
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS This procedure may be required for copiers after they are connected with the Copy Connector (B328). Do this procedure only if you or the customer notices that the color quality between the two copiers is different. The scanner gamma curve and printer gamma curve are adjusted at the factory for each machine.
PAGE 402
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April 2007 To adjust the main machine: 1. Place the test charge Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501) on the exposure glass, with the arrow mark on the chart aligned with the left rear corner. 2. Do SP4954 001 (Read/Restore Std) and press [Execute]. After about 10 seconds, the "Completed" message appears. Important: If "Completed" appears immediately after pressing [Execute], the adjustment may have failed. Do the procedure again. 3.
PAGE 403
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator. 1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the Operator Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF.
PAGE 404
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS There are 4 levels of service call conditions. Level A B C D Definition Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The machine is disabled. The operator cannot reset the SC. SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. These SCs are not shown to the operator under normal conditions. They are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected.
PAGE 405
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS Important • If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB. • If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or sensors. • When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the SC number.
PAGE 406
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 1: Scanning SC101 SC120 SC121 SC141 SC142 D D D D D Exposure lamp error The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white plate was scanned. Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor did not detect the home position (did not go OFF) after the scanner moved forward 20 mm..
PAGE 407
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC144 D SBU (Sensor Board Unit) communication error When the machine is switched • Dirty exposure glass or optics ON, or when the machine • SBU board defective returns to full operation from the • SBU harness disconnected, defective energy save mode, the machine can not access the SBU register, or the SBU register values are abnormal.
PAGE 408
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 2: Exposure SC202 SC203 D D Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed: • Within 10 seconds after turning ON. • Within 10 sec. after changing speed • Harness to polygon motor driver board disconnected, defective • Polygon motor defective • Polygon motor driver board defective • Polygon motor defective.
PAGE 409
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC220 D Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: K Leading Edge: LD0 While the polygon motor is • Harness between the laser synchronizing rotating normally, no detector and I/F unit is disconnected, synchronizing detection signal is defective output for LD0 black, or leading • Laser synchronizing detector defective edge, even after the laser diode • Beam not reflected in photo detection has been firing for 2 sec.
PAGE 410
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC224 D Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: M Leading Edge: LD0 While the polygon motor is • Harness between the laser synchronizing rotating normally, no detector and I/F unit is disconnected, synchronizing detection signal is defective output for LD0 magenta, leading • Laser synchronizing detector defective edge, even after the laser diode • Beam not reflected in photo detection has been firing for 2 sec.
PAGE 411
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC230 D FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for K write After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the black image, the PFGATE • PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) • ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 • Controller board disconnected, defective sec. when: • Harness between the BICU and LDB unit • Images are created on the disconnected, loose, or defective. drum.
PAGE 412
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC233 D FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for Y write After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the yellow image, the PFGATE • PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) • ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 • Check board connections, replace sec. when: • Images are created on the drum. • MUSIC patterns are created on the transfer belt.
PAGE 413
April, 2007 SC236 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS D SC237 SC240 SC241 SC242 SC243 FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for C write After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the cyan image, the PFGATE • PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) • ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 • Controller board disconnected, defective sec. when: • Harness between the BICU and LDB unit • Images are created on the disconnected, loose, or defective. drum.
PAGE 414
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC268 SC269 C C April 2007 Optical unit sensor error At power ON, one of the two temperature sensors in the optics unit detected a temperature lower than 0°C for more than 1 sec. -orIt detected a temperature higher than 100°C for more than 1 sec. Exposure thermistor 2 error At power on, exposure thermistor 2 detected a temperature lower than 0°C for more than 1 sec. -orIt detected a temperature higher than 100°C for more than 1 sec.
PAGE 415
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1 SC300 SC301 SC302 SC303 D D D D AC charge output error 1: K AC charge output error 2: M AC charge output error 3: C AC charge output error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of • High voltage power supply the power pack every 2 ms. This • BICU defective SC is issued if the BICU detects • OPC unit defective a short in the AC charge for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow (V = 0, for example) for 500 ms (250 times). 1.
PAGE 416
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC320 SC321 SC322 SC323 D D D D Development power pack error 1: K Development power pack error 2: M Development power pack error 3: C Development power pack error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of • Development power pack defective the each power pack every 2 • High voltage power supply defective ms.
PAGE 417
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC336 SC337 SC338 SC339 D D D D Developer set error 1: K Developer set error 2: M Developer set error 3: C Developer set error 4: Y The value of Vcnt is set at the • Film seal not removed from the black, maximum or minimum setting magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case when the TD sensor is initialized. Open the front door. Pull out the film seal from the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case.
PAGE 418
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC360 SC361 SC362 SC363 D D D D April 2007 TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K TD sensor (Vt high) error 2: M TD sensor (Vt high) error 3: C TD sensor (Vt high) error 4: Y The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds 4.5V for two counts. • Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected • Harness between TD sensor and PCU defective • Defective TD sensor. 1. Turn the machine OFF and ON. 2.
PAGE 419
April, 2007 SC372 SC373 SC374 SC375 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS D D D D TD sensor adjustment error 1: K TD sensor adjustment error 2: M TD sensor adjustment error 3: C TD sensor adjustment error 4: Y During TD sensor initialization with SP3801, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of 3.2±0.
PAGE 420
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 SC400 D ID sensor error 1: Calibration Before adjustment Vsg_reg<0.5 but Vsg_reg could not be adjusted to the target Vsg_reg = 4.0±0.2V during process control. • ID sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective • ID sensor dirty • ID sensor defective • ITB unit drawer connector dirty Note: Vsg_reg is the voltage reading of the light reflected directly from the bare surface of the ITB.
PAGE 421
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC420 SC421 SC422 SC423 C C C C Potential sensor error 1: Vd Adjustment K Potential sensor error 2: Vd Adjustment M Potential sensor error 3: Vd Adjustment C Potential sensor error 4: Vd Adjustment Y The development potential of • Toner density low the drum before exposure (Vd) cannot be adjusted to within ±10 V of the target voltage (900V).
PAGE 422
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC440 SC441 SC442 SC443 D D D D April 2007 Image transfer power pack error 1: K Image transfer power pack error 2: M Image transfer power pack error 3: C Image transfer power pack error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of • the power pack every 2 ms. This SCis issued if the BICU detects a • short in the power pack for K, M, C, or Y 250 times within 500 ms.
PAGE 423
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC460 D Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of • Damaged insulation on the high-voltage the power pack every 2 ms. This supply cable SC is issued if the BICU detects • Damaged insulation around the higha short in the power pack 250 voltage power supply. times at D(AC) within 500 ms. 1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable. 2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit. 3. Replace the IOB.
PAGE 424
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC496 C April 2007 MUSIC sensor error The MUSIC sensor detected an abnormal pattern on the ITB because: • A/D converter exceeded upper or lower limit. • The pattern used to calculate the amount of skew is abnormal. • The reading of the pattern exceeded the length of time the LED projected light. • LED light could not be adjusted correctly. • MUSIC sensor defective or disconnected • MUSIC pattern abnormal; do a forced process control (SP3821) and check the result (section 4.2.4).
PAGE 425
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed SC501 B Tray 1 (tandem tray) feed error (Japan Only) • The tray 1 lift sensor does not • Tray lift motor harness disconnected, switch ON 10 s after the tray loose, defective lift motor switches ON and • Paper or other obstacle trapped between starts lifting the bottom plate. tray and motor • When the tray lowers, the tray • Tray lift sensor disconnected, damaged lift sensor does not go off • Lower limit sensor disconnected, within 1.5 sec.
PAGE 426
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC505 SC506 SC510 C B B April 2007 Tandem tray rear fence motor error • The return sensor does not • switch ON within 10 sec. after the rear fence motor switches • ON. • The HP sensor does not • switch ON 10 sec. after the rear fence motor switches • ON. • The HP sensor and return • sensor switch ON at the same time.
PAGE 427
April, 2007 SC515 SC516 SC520 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS C B A Duplex jogger motor error 1 When the jogger fence moves to the home position, the jogger fence HP sensor does not switch on even after the duplex jogger motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm. Duplex jogger motor error 2 When the jogger fence moves from the home position, the jogger fence HP sensor does not turn off even if the duplex jogger motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
PAGE 428
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC533 SC534 D D April 2007 Fan error 4: fusing exhaust fan The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec. while the fan that draws air out of the fusing unit was operating. Fan error 5: duplex exhaust fan The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec. while the fan that draws air out of the duplex unit was operating.
PAGE 429
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC543 A Heating roller thermistor 1 error 3: Software - High temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 230°C. • IOB defective • BICU defective • Fusing temperature out of control Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC544 A Heating roller thermistor 1 error 4: Hardware - High temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 260°C.
PAGE 430
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC548 A Heating roller thermistor 2 error 2: Failed to reach warmup temperature After the main switch is turned ON or • Thermistor is bent, installed the cover is closed, the heating roller incorrectly temperature does not reach the ready • Defective heating roller thermistor temperature within 2 sec. after the • Heating roller fusing lamp broken heater switches ON.
PAGE 431
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC553 A Pressure roller thermistor error 3: Software - High temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 220°C. • IOB defective • BICU defective • Fusing temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC554 A Pressure roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 230°C.
PAGE 432
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC563 A Hot roller thermistor error 3: Software - High Temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 250°C 10 • IOB defective times within 1 sec. • BICU defective • Fusing temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC564 A Hot roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High Temperature The thermistor detected a • TRIAC short temperature over 260°C.
PAGE 433
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 6: Device Communication SC620 D ARDF communication error A BREAK signal occurs after the machine detects the ARDF, or a communication timeout occurs.
PAGE 434
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC630 C RSS communication error (Not use) An error was detected in • No action required communication via RSS between the machine and the RSS center. Error occurred on a public line at the RSS terminal. SC632 B Key/card counter device error 1 (Not use) After 1 data frame is sent to the • The serial line from the device to the device, an ACK signal is not copier is unstable, disconnected, or received within 100 ms, and is not defective. received after 3 retries.
PAGE 435
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC680 D BICU-MUSIC communication error The main CPU fails to • UART communication failure; replace the communicate with the MUSIC BICU CPU within 5 sec. and three attempts failed. SC687 D Memory address command error The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration.
PAGE 436
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 7: Peripherals SC701 SC705 SC720 SC721 D D D B Original pick-up operation error Even though the pick-up motor is rotating clock-wise, the pick-up roller home position sensor cannot detect the position of the pickup roller. ARDF bottom plate lift motor • The bottom plate HP sensor did not detect the home position of the bottom plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches ON and lowers the bottom plate.
PAGE 437
April, 2007 SC723 SC724 SC725 SC726 SC727 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS B D D B B Finisher feed-out motor The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the specified time after the stack feed-out belt motor turns ON. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
PAGE 438
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC728 SC730 B B April 2007 Shift jogger retraction motor error The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the retraction motor switches ON. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position.
PAGE 439
April, 2007 SC743 SC744 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS B B Booklet stapler motor error 1 The front stapler unit saddlestitch motor does not start operation within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Booklet stapler motor error 2 The rear stapler unit saddlestitch motor does not start operation within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
PAGE 440
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC753 SC760 SC761 SC762 SC763 SC764 B D B B April 2007 Return roller motor error Occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor. Finisher punch motor error The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor turned ON. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
PAGE 441
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC765 B SC766 B SC767 B Folding unit bottom fence lift motor The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. • Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective • Motor defective Clamp roller retraction motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
PAGE 442
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC781 B Z-Fold lower stopper motor Japan Only The lower stopper motor does • Lower stopper motor disconnected, not attain the prescribed speed defective within the specified time. • Lower stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction • Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective SC782 B Z-Fold upper stopper motor Japan Only The upper stopper motor does • Upper stopper motor disconnected, not attain the prescribed speed defective within the specified time.
PAGE 443
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC800: Overall System SC817 SC818 SC819 C C C Boot loader error The boot loader cannot read one of the following: self-diagnostic module, kernel, or one of the files of the root file system, or the check of one of these items on the system SD card failed. Watchdog error While the system program is running, a bus hold or interrupt program goes into an endless loop, preventing any other programs from executing.
PAGE 444
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC821 C April 2007 Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for management of the internal bus gate. Error code 0xffff ffff is 0B00 • ASIC (controller board defective) returned when the register Write & Verify check is executed on the ASIC mounted on the controller board. The ASIC controls the ROM and buses for other devices.
PAGE 445
April, 2007 SC824 C SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM socket damaged • • • • NVRAM defective Controller board defective NVRAM backup battery exhausted NVRAM socket damaged SC826 C Self-diagnostic error 6: NVRAM (option NVRAM) The difference between the 1 • NVRAM defective 1501 s measured for RTC in the • NVRAM installed incorrectly NVRAM and the 1 s timeout • Replace RTC backup battery of the CPU is out of range, or th
PAGE 446
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC850 SC851 SC853 SC854 SC855 SC856 SC857 SC860 B B B B B B B B April 2007 Net I/F error • Duplicate IP addresses. • Illegal IP address. • Driver unstable and cannot be used on the network. IEEE 1394 I/F error (Not use) Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F. Wireless LAN Error 1 (Not use) During machine start-up, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).
PAGE 447
April, 2007 SC861 SC863 SC864 SC865 SC866 SC867 D D D D B D SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS HDD re-try failure At power ON with the HDD detected, power supply to the HDD is interrupted, after the HDD is awakened from the sleep mode, the HDD is not ready within 30 s. HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated during operation. HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to an CRC error query.
PAGE 448
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC868 SC870 SC873 SC874 SC875 SC880 D B B D D D April 2007 SD card error 3: SD card access An error occurred while an SD card was used. • SD card not inserted correctly • SD card defective • Controller board defective Note: If you want to try to reformat the SD card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1. Address book data error Address book data on the hard • Software defective. Turn the machine disk was detected as abnormal OFF/ON.
PAGE 449
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC900: Miscellaneous SC900 D SC910 SC911 SC912 SC913 B SC914 SC919 SC920 SC921 Electrical total counter error The total counter contains something that is not a number.
PAGE 450
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC925 B April 2007 Net File function error The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used. HDD status codes are displayed below: • Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
PAGE 451
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Recovery from SC 925 Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865. Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn the machine power OFF and ON. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting).
PAGE 452
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC990 SC991 D C April 2007 Software error 2 The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. *1 • Software defective, re-boot Software error 3 The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue.
PAGE 453
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS These codes are also used in the SMC report. Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4digit hexadecimal number. SC No. 853 D Symptom IEEE802 11b card startup error Not used. 854 D IEEE802 11b card access error Not used. IEEE802 11b card error Not used. IEEE802 11b card connection board error Not used.
PAGE 454
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.1 TRAY PAPER SIZE SETTING SYMPTOM: The size of the paper in the tray does not match the paper size that is displayed on the LCD. Sometimes, this causes a jam to occur. CAUSE: The operator did not set the side fence or end fence correctly. Note: This can cause the machine to detect the wrong paper size when “Auto Paper Size Detection” is ON. ACTION: Advise users to: • Make sure to set the end fence [A] and side fences [B] correctly.
PAGE 455
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.2 PAPER MISFEED (J098/J099) SYMPTOM: “Paper Misfeed (J098)" or "Paper Misfeed (J099)" is displayed on the operation panel.
PAGE 456
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 ACTION: Advise end users to do the following. 1. If J098 or J099 occur, press the "Next" button [A] on the operation panel. Then, follow the instructions that are displayed. 2. Do one of the following: • Make sure the type and thickness of the paper match the type and thickness settings in the machine. OR, • Turn OFF the Paper Type Detect and Double Feed Detect settings (see next page).
PAGE 457
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS How to Change the “Paper Thickness” and “Paper Type” Settings: 1. Access: User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings (screen 2/4). 2. Press [B] to change the paper type and press [C] to change the paper thickness. [C] [B] How to Change the "Paper Type Detect" or "Double Feed Detect" Setting: 1. Access: User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings (screen 4/4). 2. Press [D] to change the "Paper Type Detect" setting (ON/OFF). 3.
PAGE 458
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.3 PAPER FEED SKEW SYMPTOM: Paper feed skew sometimes occurs (Printer and Copier). CAUSE: The registration roller bushing on rear side is damaged by some reason. One of the reasons of damaging the bushing is that the tip of the rear registration pressure spring is facing the wrong way. As a result, the spring touches the bushing when the registration roller rotates, and damages the bushing. NOTE: For the location of this bushing, see callout #25 on pg.
PAGE 459
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 2. Pull out the lower drawer unit [C]. 3. Remove the 3 clamps [D]. [C] [D] 4. Remove 2 clamps [E] and disconnect the connector [F].
PAGE 460
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 5. Remove the bracket [G] (1 screw). [G] 6. Remove the harness cover [H] (1 screw).
PAGE 461
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 7. Check the position of rear registration pressure spring [I]. If the spring is in the NG position, change the spring to the OK position.
PAGE 462
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.4 WHITE LINE IN SUB-SCAN DIRECTION ON SINGLE COLOR SOLID IMAGE. SYMPTOM: A white line [A] appears along the paper feed direction in solid image areas that use one toner color (C, M, Y or K). [A] Paper Feed Direction CAUSE: Dust or other foreign particles get into the development unit, and then get stuck between the doctor blade and development sleeve. ACTION: • When the symptom occurs: 1. Remove the developer from the development unit(s) that shows the symptom. 2.
PAGE 463
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.5 DIRTY BLACK LINE IN CUB-SCAN DIRECTION OR DIRTY BACKGROUND SYMPTOM: 1. A dirty black line [A] shows in the sub-scan direction in single color (C, M, Y or K). [A] Paper Feed Direction <> 2. Dirty back ground in halftone image. CAUSE: Drum charge roller becomes dirty.
PAGE 464
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 2. Remove the charge roller unit [A] (2 screws). This unit contains the charge roller and the charge roller cleaning roller. [A] 3. Remove the drum charge roller with gear and bushing. 4. Remove the drum charge roller gear [B] and the bushing [C] at the same time (See below figure). Do not touch the black part of the drum charge roller. [B] [C] NOTE: Do not remove the bushing on the non-gear side.
PAGE 465
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 5. Clean the drum charge roller. 1) Wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth. 2) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a wet cloth. NOTE: Use "water" to make the cloth wet. Do not use alcohol or any solvent. 3) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth again. Wait for the drum charge roller to dry. Water drop such as this should not remain. NG 6. Clean the charge roller cleaning roller [D] with vacuum cleaner if it is also dirty.
PAGE 466
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 7. Reinstall the drum charge roller onto the charge roller unit (1-bushing, 1-gear). NOTE: Make sure bushing is inserted correctly inside the molding guide [F]. Also make sure the charging terminal [G] touches the charge roller end correctly. [F] [G] Bushing is not inserted correctly inside the molding guide. 8. Reinstall the charge roller unit onto the PCU (2 screws).
PAGE 467
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS APPENDIX: How to print out the Black, Magenta, Cyan, or Yellow halftone test pattern to confirm the symptom. 1. Enter SP 2109 2 (Test Pattern: Select Pattern). 2. Select "8: 2-Dot Independent" pattern, then press the "OK" button. 3. Under this condition, enter following SP according to the color you want to print out.
PAGE 468
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.6 EXPANDED SOFT TONER CARTRIDGE SYMPTOM: The Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) expands and cannot be installed in the copier bins. CAUSE: When the STC is brought to an elevation of 1000m (3,280ft.) or higher, the difference in air pressure makes the STC expand. ACTION: 1. Wait 24 hours for the STC to return to its normal size naturally. 2. If the customer cannot wait 24 hours, advise them to use the STC Air Release Kit (service parts: P/N B1329710).
PAGE 469
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.7 SYSTEM STOP CONTROL DUE TO THE TEMPERATURE LIMITATION OVERVIEW: 1. The “System Stop Control” feature stops the machine during a copy or print job, and “Self-checking…” is displayed on the LCD. Conditions: • Engine firmware v1.15.0 (B1325402L) or newer • The temperature/humidity sensor output is 41°C (105.8F) or higher. Other notes: • This feature keeps the temperature of the toner in the development unit below 50°C (122F).
PAGE 470
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.8 LOW POWER MODE TEMPERATURE SYMPTOM: Fusing hot roller yield may decrease, or, the fusing hot roller could get damaged in the worst case. CAUSE: Hot roller has been exposed to excessive heat by the fusing lamp inside the Hot Roller. ACTION: • Never increase the Low Power Mode temperature setting (SP 1202 11) for the fusing lamp inside the Hot Roller higher than default setting.
PAGE 471
April, 2007 Machine Status Warming Up Operation Stand-by Mode Panel-off Mode Low Power Mode Auto Off Mode ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Transition time setting in UP: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings 9 min (Fixed) - Hot Roller Heater ON/OFF ON OFF ON Panel-off Timer Default: 60 sec.
PAGE 472
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER SYMPTOM: Part of the image peels off the paper. Note: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions: z When solid images are printed onto 100 g/m2 (28lb. bond) paper in full color mode z When using a PostScript3 unit type3260 (B761) or using EFI printer controller (G815: E-7000) CAUSE: Not enough heat is supplied to the surface of the fusing roller. SOLUTION: Add the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" by the following action.
PAGE 473
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode 1. Power Supply Voltage Check when using before applying the final solution. Check the Power Supply Voltage during the continuous printing. If the power supply voltage is lower than 220V, change the heating roller lamp2 duty for FC printing. SP1108-008 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Norm: FC) Change to 100 (default: 83) SP1108-009 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Scan: FC) Change to 83 (default: 66) 2.
PAGE 474
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP settings as a set. 1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp): Change to 1 (default: 0) NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode". 2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper): Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK" button. (Default: "3 Special Paper 1"). NOTE: This is to change the paper transfer conditions to those for Normal Paper.
PAGE 475
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 6. Change the Fusing Temperature settings according to the type of "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", which is most appropriate for the poor fusing symptom. 1) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -1" (Default) NOTE: This setting is effective both for poor fusing and the sponge image / stripper streaks. You do NOT have to change any SP settings (Default settings are OK). • SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM) Default: 180.
PAGE 476
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 NOTE: Please refer to the below table to select most appropriate type of Middle Thickness Paper Mode. Type "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -1" (Default) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -2" "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -3" Effectiveness level for poor fusing. Less than previous temporary solution B or B+ Same as previous temporary solution B or B+ Better than previous temporary solution B or B+ Stripper Streaks level.
PAGE 477
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS APPENDIX: Default settings of SP modes related to previous Temporary Solutions A, B and B+ SP Number 1105-003 1105-006 1105-007 1105-008 1105-009 1105-014 1105-015 1105-016 1105-017 1105-029 1107-007 1107-008 1107-015 1108-008 1108-009 1108-017 9406-001 Description Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr Wait Temp: Norm Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr 1-S: Norm: 1 Col Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr 1-S:Norm:FC Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr 1-S: Trace:1C Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr 1-S: Trace: FC Htg: Roll Sn1: Ctr 2-S: Norm: 1C Htg: Roll S
PAGE 478
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.
PAGE 479
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.11 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER SYMPTOM: Streaks are visible on the glossy image printed with full coverage. Visible level of streaks differs according to the lighting angle. The streaks can be classified following 3 types. 1. Type A: Streaks, whose width is equal to the fusing separation pawls (6 mm), in the paper feeding direction corresponding to the fusing separation pawls position. This symptom occurs especially on the solid image on the Thick paper. 2.
PAGE 480
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 CAUSE and SOLUTION: Use the table below to check if the reported symptom is Type A, Type B or Type C. • The causes and solutions are different for Type A, Type B and Type C. • After reading this table, if you do not know which type the reported symptom is, contact your sales company for support.
PAGE 481
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit (P/N B1329713): Detailed part information: The kit consists of the following parts (see illustration “Parts Locations” on next page): Gear Hot Roller: 44Z [A] Gear Upper 52Z [B] Gear 49Z [C] Pressure Roller D50 [D] Important Notes: 1. This kit is only effective for Type A and Type C explained above. 2. After you install this kit for Type A, it may take some time before the image quality improves.
PAGE 482
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 Parts Location ([A] and [B]) [A] 1 30 102 13 2 27 [B] 14 15 101 103 1 103 27 23 3 6 7 10 22 12 101 11 24 8 9 10 23 103 19 21 5 20 29 18 102 4 16 28 103 31 103 22 101 17 12 26 103 24 11 25 26 101 Parts Location ([C] and [D]) [D] [C] 13 14 107 103 103 9 103 6 103 19 103 108 105 20 21 103 106 10 103 103 25 30 28 103 27 32 103 6 103 20 26 103 103 105 31 24 11 105 11 104 23 26 33 105 24 17 18 103 22 1
PAGE 483
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.12 COPIER FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTICE WHEN COLOR CONTROLLER E-7000 IS INSTALLED Important Note for Firmware Update on e-STUDIO4500c/5500c Machines Connected to an E-7000 Color Controller Before you update the Copier Engine firmware with an SD card, make sure to turn off the power switch on the Color Controller E-7000 (see Procedure below). REASON: If the power switch on the Color Controller E-7000 is on, the firmware update will not start.
PAGE 484
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 2. Turn off the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch. NOTE: The Color Controller E-7000 will shut down automatically. Main Power Switch 3. Wait for the E-7000 diagnostic LEDs to turn off. Diagnostic LEDs Switch 4. Turn off the main power switch of the Color Controller E-7000. Main Power Switch 5. Put the firmware SD card into Slot 3 and turn on the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch. 6.
PAGE 485
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.13 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER SYMPTOM: Part of the image peels off the paper. NOTE: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions: • When solid images are printed onto 100g/m2 (28lb.) paper in full color mode • When using a Ricoh PostScript3 printer driver or using Fiery controller CAUSE: Not enough heat is supplied to the surface of the fusing roller. SOLUTION: Add the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" by the following action.
PAGE 486
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 2. Toner Maximum Limitation If the customer agrees to the toner maximum limitation change, reduce the value as follows: • For machines that use a Ricoh PS driver: Set SP1106-001 to a value of 200. Printer SP Number 1106-001 Description Toner Limit: Photo Default Settings 260 Final Solution 200 NOTE Toner maximum limitation for Photo mode. • For the Fiery E-7000 controller: 1. Open the "E-7000 PS Document Properties" dialog. 2.
PAGE 487
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP settings as a set. 1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp): Change to 1 (default: 0) NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode". 2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper): Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK" button. (default: "3 Special Paper 1"). NOTE: This is to change the paper transfer conditions to those for Normal Paper.
PAGE 488
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 5. Select the Paper Thickness Setting to "Normal Paper" for the tray, on which you need to apply "Middle Thickness Paper Mode." User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Thickness Setting Then, select "Normal (72-126g/m2)” for the tray. 6. Change the Fusing Temperature settings according to the type of "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", which is most appropriate for the poor fusing symptom.
PAGE 489
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 3) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -3" NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle Thickness Paper Mode-2" is still not enough for the poor fusing. However, with this setting, it is easier for separation pawl streaks to occur. Change the following SP setting as a set.
PAGE 490
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.14 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT This chapter shows you how to measure and adjust the nip width. Important: If a finisher is installed on the machine, remove it before you begin these procedures. MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH: 1. Load one OHP sheet (“3M PP2500 Transparency Film”) in the bypass tray. 2. Turn OFF “Paper Type Detect “ and “Double Feed Detect” for the bypass tray. 3. Make sure the following SP modes are set to their defaults.
PAGE 491
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 5. Measure the nip width on the OHP sheet and make sure it is within specification. NOTE: Note: See Nip Width Specifications below. [A] [B] OHP sheet [E] [F] Center of OHP sheet Feed Direction [C] [D] NIP WIDTH SPECIFICATIONS: All of the following must be true. 1. ([E] + [F]) / 2 = 11.1 +/- 0.3mm and 2. The difference between [A] and [C] is 0.5mm or smaller and 3. The difference between [B] and [D] is 0.
PAGE 492
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH: 1. Remove the fusing unit from the copier and place it on the table. [H] [G] 2. Make sure the pressure levers ([I], [J]) are in the upper position as shown in Photo A. NOTE: If the levers are not in the upper position, pressure will not be applied between the fusing belt and pressure roller. Photo B: NG Photo A: OK [I] [J] [I] [J] 3. Turn screws [G] and [H] to bring the nip width to within specification.
PAGE 493
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5. SERVICE TABLES 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust values. CAUTION Never turn OFF the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power OFF, wait for the power LED to go OFF, and then switch the main power switch OFF.
PAGE 494
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE April, 2007 To Enter and Exit the Service Mode 1. Press the [Clear Modes] ( )key. 2. On the operation panel keypad, press "107". 3. Hold down the Clear/Stop ( ) key for more than 3 seconds. The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer/scanner unit (GM-2100) is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are also displayed. To enter normal Copy SP mode, press “Copy SP”. 4.
PAGE 495
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Button Selection Entry 1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables in this section to find the SP that you want to adjust. 2. Press the Group number on the left side of the SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust. 3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the SP number that you want to open, then press that number to expand the list. 4.
PAGE 496
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE April, 2007 SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 14APR 2002 03:25 SP Mode (Service) Open All Close All Copy Window SP1XXX Group SP2XXX Page X-XXX-XXX SP Direct Exit COPY: SP1-001-001 SP3XXX Line SP4XXX SP5XXX SP6XXX (6) (7) (8) (9) 21 Line Initial Page 0 (10) SP7XXX Group Prev Page SP8XXX Next Page B140S907.WMF (1): (2): Open All. Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Close All.
PAGE 497
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP Mode Print (SMC report print) You can print an SMC Report to check the machine’s condition. The SMC Report is a list of the SP commands and their settings. 5990 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 021 022 023 SP Mode Print (SMC Report Print) In the SP mode, press ‘Copy Window’ to move to the copy screen, select the paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure that all the information is printed.
PAGE 498
RESETS April, 2007 5.2 RESETS 5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example). It is a list of all the SP initial settings. Refer to this list if you need to initialize one or more SPs. The initial SP settings are also written in the SP mode tables at the end of this section.
PAGE 499
April, 2007 RESETS No. What It Initializes 1 All Clear 2 Engine 3 SCS 4 IMH Memory 5 MCS 6 7 8 Copier application Fax application Printer application 9 Scanner application 10 Web Service/ Network application 11 NCS 14 15 16 Clear DCS Setting Clear UCS Setting MIRS Setting 17 CCS Comments Initializes items 2 to 15 below. Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
PAGE 500
RESETS April, 2007 5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET Software Reset The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. To do a software reset: Turn the main power switch OFF and ON. -orPress and hold down [•/] and [#] together for at least 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for operation.
PAGE 501
April, 2007 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002 Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU. NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an SC may occur. 1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2109 002 2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#]. 3.
PAGE 502
TEST PATTERN PRINTING April, 2007 5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417 The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can be used as follows: • To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly. • To fine tune image processing • To trace the causes of poor images. For example, if the IPU test patterns are normal when the machine is producing poor quality images, then the problem must be after the IPU if the flow of image processing. 1. Enter the SP mode, select SP4417. 2.
PAGE 503
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE SD cards are used to update the software and to back up important data.
PAGE 504
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 [A] [B] B132S801.WMF Firmware Update Procedure 1. Disconnect these items if they are installed: • Network cable • Interface cable NOTE: This prevents outside interference from data transfers to the machine while the software is being uploaded. 2. Obtain the System SD card (P/N B1325730). 3. Turn the main switch OFF. 4. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the controller ( x2). 5.
PAGE 505
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE PCcard -> ROM Page01 Engine (1) System (2) NA ROM: ROM: ROM: ROM: ROM: ROM: 00000000 0.01 60705254 12.16:16 B0705370 11.22 NEW: NEW: NEW: NEW: NEW: NEW: G0000000 0.08 60705254 12.16:16 B0705370 12.31 EU Exit (0) B132S901.WMF Using the Screen: • To select the item for upgrade, press the selection on the touch panel, or press the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation panel. The number in parentheses tells you which key to press.
PAGE 506
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 PCcard -> ROM Loading System *****________ B132S903.WMF 8. Check the notations to the right. • "ROM" tells you the module number and version of the currently installed software. • "NEW" tells you the module number and version of software on the SD card in Slot 3. 9. Press the names of the items on the left that you want to update (Engine, System, or Operation Panel). The items you select change to dark gray.
PAGE 507
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTE: During operation panel update the screen is blank and the progress bar is not displayed. To monitor the progress of the operation panel update watch the [Start] key. While opeation panel update is in progress, the [Start] key LED flashes RED. The [Start] key lights GREEN when the operation panel update has completed. 11. Turn the power OFF and ON. 12. Remove the SD card.
PAGE 508
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 Errors During Firmware Update If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first line. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example). Error Message Table NO.
PAGE 509
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA You must download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk after the HDD has been formatted or has been replaced and formatted. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.). 1. Go into the SP mode. 1. Select SP5853 then press “Execute”. 2. Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure. 3.
PAGE 510
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card Always upload the NVRAM data to an SD card before you repolace the NVRAM. 1. Before you turn the machine OFF, do SP5990 001 (SMC Report Print). This gives you a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails and tells you the serial number of the machine. 2. Turn the copier main power switch OFF. 3. Put the SD card into Slot 3, then turn the copier ON. 4.
PAGE 511
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do this procedure to take the data uploaded from the NVRAM and download it to the new NVRAM. • If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not complete correctly. • If the download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
PAGE 512
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY Notation [range/step] DFU Japan only LEF SEF What it means Example: [–9 to +9/0.1 mm] The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range ±9. Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in the “Initial” box immediately below the entry box. Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value. The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
PAGE 513
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Abbreviations for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c SP Service Tables The SP titles are abbreviated so they can be used in smaller the 2-line displays of future printer models. Refer to this list if you do not understand the meaning of an abbreviation.
PAGE 514
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES Group 1000 1001 001 Lead Edge Reg Leading Edge Regisration Adjustment Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern (SP2109, Pattern No. 10). [–9~+9/0.1mm] Specification: 3±2mm 1002 Side-to-Side Reg Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using the test pattern (SP2109, Pattern No. 10).
PAGE 515
April, 2007 1009 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Fine Adj Reg Spd Fine Adjust Registration Line Speed The SP allows fine adjustment fine adjustment of the registration roller speed to adjust the line speed. Reg. Roller Registration Roller: Fine Adjust Speed Allows fine adjustment of the registration roller line speed. [-3~+3/0.
PAGE 516
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1105 Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr Heating Roller 001 Prefeed Temp 002 Reload Temp 003 Wait Temp:Norm 004 Wait Temp:Low 005 Wait Temp:High 006 1-S Norm:1Col 007 1-S:Norm :FC 008 1-S:Trace:1C 009 1-S:Trace:FC 010 1-S:Thk1:1C:HS 011 1-S:Thk1:FC:HS 012 1-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM 013 1-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM 014 2-S:Norm:1C 015 2-S:Norm:FC 016 2-S:Trace:1C 017 2-S:Trace:FC 018 2-S:Thk1:1C:HS 019 2-S:Thk1:FC:HS 020 2-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM 021 2-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM April, 2007 He
PAGE 517
April, 2007 022 Thk2:1C:HS 023 Thk2:FC:HS 024 Cont OHP:1C 025 Cont OHO:FC 026 OHP:1C:100mm/s 027 OHP:FC:100mm/s 028 PressRoll Reload Temp 029 Wait Temp:Norm 030 Wait:Temp:Low 031 Wait:Temp:High 032 1-S Norm 033 2-S Norm 034 Cont OHP 035 SemiT OHP:100mm/s 036 HotRoll Wait Temp: Norm 037 Wait Temp: Low 038 Wait Temp: High SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.] During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.
PAGE 518
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1106 001 002 003 004 005 006 1107 April, 2007 Fusing Temp Disp Fusing Lamp Control Method/Temperature Display These SP codes control the temperature control of the hot roller and display the temperatures of the hot roller, pressure roller, heating roller, and heating roller lamps.
PAGE 519
April, 2007 011 Fuse Exit Temp 012 Add Rot Time 013 Stand Cool On/Off Thk2 (0:Off 1:On) 014 To Cooling Mode Thk2/OHP Cool End 015 Trace Cool End 016 Edge Cool On/Off Start (0:No 1:Yes) SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES The temperature used to calculate the temperature specified for the hot roller at the end of fusing/exit motor rotation when the warmup temperature has been reached. [0~30/1 deg.
PAGE 520
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1108 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 April, 2007 Htg Roll Lamp 1 Heating Roller: Fusing Lamps Controls the level of the power (percentage) supplied to the heating rollers (Watts) when the machine is in the specified mode. At Reload During warmup after the machine is switched or returns from and energy save mode. Wait Time While the machine is in the standby mode and ready for operation.
PAGE 521
April, 2007 1110 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 002 Paper Type Selet Paper Type Select These SP settings switch the ON/OFF the paper type type detection and doublefeed functions. [0~1/1] 0: Enable 1: Disable Two sensors, one mounted above and one below the paper at the registration rollers, detect the opacity of the first sheet and compares this reading for every subsequent sheet. If the reading is higher (thicker paper) or lower (thinner paper) the sensor triggers an error.
PAGE 522
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1200 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 1201 001 002 April, 2007 1st CMP Down This SP adjusts the temperature of the heating roller at the start of the CMP down modes for black-and-white copying in normal/high temperature environments. 1st CPM Down 1st CMP Down (Heating Roller Temperature) Normal temperature, high temperature environment StrTemp:Low/Hi:1C [–20~0/1 deg.] StrTemp:Low/Hi:FC Low temperature environment StrTemp:Low:1C [–20~0/1 deg.
PAGE 523
April, 2007 1202 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 1203 001 002 003 004 005 1901 001 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Set Fusing Temp Set Fusing Temperature (for shift to low power mode) This SP sets the time interval for the machine to remain idle to trigger lower power mode 1. Set Fusing Temp EngSave Time 1 [0~60/1 min.] EngSave Time 2 [0~90/5 min.] EngSave Time 3 [0~24/0.5 hour] Heating Roller Energy Save 1 [-200~0/1 deg.] Energy Save 2 [-200~0/1 deg.] Energy Save 3 [-200~0/1 deg.
PAGE 524
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1905 001 002 April, 2007 Bypass Thk Bypass Tray: Thick Paper This SP switches the thick paper mode ON and OFF for thick paper and index sheet feed from the bypass tray. 0:No 1:Yes Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode Switches the thick paper mode ON/OFF for feed from the bypass tray. 0:OFF 1:ON 0:No 1:Yes Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode Switches the thick paper mode ON/OFF for feed of index sheets from the bypass tray.
PAGE 525
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 2000 2101 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 2102 001 005 006 007 008 2103 001 002 003 004 005 2104 001 002 003 Reg Col Interval Color Interval Registration Adjustment Use these SPs to correct problems with color registration. Color registration problems can be detected by checking the results of 2901 002 Pattern 1. Before doing these adjustments, try to solve the problem by doing SP2111. For more, see Section "4.
PAGE 526
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2105 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 2106 2107 005 006 2108 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 LD Syn PM Adj LD Pulse Modulation Synchronization Adjustment: DFU No information is available at this time. K0 [-117~127/] M0 C0 Y0 K1 M1 C1 Y1 Poly Mtr OFF Polygon Motor Off Setting The polygon motor turns OFF if the machine receives no print job for the time specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
PAGE 527
April, 2007 2109 001 002 004 005 006 007 008 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Test Pattern Write Test Pattern Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU. Image Add Select "1" to have the patterns selected with SP2109 002 print overlapped on one another. [0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On Select Pattern Allows you to select the pattern to print.
PAGE 528
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2110 001 2111 Force Tnr Cycle Force Toner Supply Cycle Forces 2-Point interval correction. Force Tnr Pos Force Toner Position Alignment Executes the MUSIC feature. MUSIC is the "Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction". Three MUSIC sensors mounted above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns developed on the ITB.
PAGE 529
April, 2007 2151 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 Prt Area Coeff Coefficient Setting: Print Area Only DFU These SPs adjust the magnification coefficient for each color in these areas: • Mid Area 0-3 • Small Area 1-3 • Small Area 5-8 K MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] 021 C MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] K MidArea3 022 C MidArea3 K SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01] 023 C SmallArea1 [1~99/0.
PAGE 530
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 007 PaperInt:2Pt Meas 008 JobInt:2Pt Meas 010 Interrupt Int 012 MUSIC:Temp Chg 013 MUSIC:2Pt TempChg 014 MUSIC Density Lvl 015 Door Open:Wait 016 Clear Main Slip 020 Sensor Light 1 021 Sensor Light 2 022 Sensor Light 3 023 AutoLight:PreAdj 025 AdjCoeff:FrontKf 026 AdjCoeff:CtrKc 027 AdjCoeff:RearKr 028 Min Patch Fine 029 Min Patch:Rough April, 2007 Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of image page intervals.
PAGE 531
April, 2007 030 CMY:LowMin. 031 CMY:MidMin. 032 Base MaxDiff 033 Patch Mini Gap 034 Light Target Adj 035 MY Light Max 036 037 038 039 040 041 Add Upper Limit Add Lower Limit LaserX:FrontXf LaserX:CenterXc LaserX: RearXr LaserX: TempCoeff 2154 001 002 003 004 2155 001 002 003 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.1V] No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.1V] No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.
PAGE 532
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2180 001 002 2181 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 021 022 023 024 025 026 April, 2007 Lens Temp Lens Temperature Monitor These SPs display the measured temperatures of the optical lenses for each color. M-K Displays the measured temperature of the magenta and black lenses (in the laser optics). [0~999/0.1 deg] Y-C Displays the measured temperature of the yellow and cyan lenses (in the laser optics). [0~999/0.
PAGE 533
April, 2007 027 Y Sub Skew 3 030 MUSIC Result 2182 001 002 003 2183 001 002 003 004 2201 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 2202 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan direction at sensor 3. Displays the result of MUSIC adjustment Skew Corr Total Skew Correction Total These SPs display the total skew correction for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
PAGE 534
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2204 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 011 012 013 014 016 017 018 019 021 022 023 024 2211 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 April, 2007 AC Charge Corr AC Charge: Setting for Ambient Correction These SPs adjust the target ac current for each operating environment (LL, ML, etc.). The process control self-check adjusts the ac current to achieve the target voltage. SP2901 003 (PCU) displays the most recent absolute temperature.
PAGE 535
April, 2007 2212 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 2251 001 002 003 004 005 006 2252 001 002 003 004 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Set Dev DC Development DC: Fixed Setting These SPs set the development dc bias for the standard speed mode and low speed mode for each color, but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). The dc development bias (absolute value) is set to –200 V, and the default for each color is set to –500 V.
PAGE 536
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2253 001 002 003 004 005 006 2260 001 002 003 004 005 2261 001 002 003 004 005 006 April, 2007 Manual Tnr Fill Manually Fill Development Unit Sub Hoppers Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light. After you press "Execute" the toner supply cluth switches ON for 2 sec. and then OFF for 0.1 sec.
PAGE 537
April, 2007 2262 001 002 003 004 005 2263 001 002 003 004 2264 2265 001 002 003 004 2301 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES TD Sn Chk TD (toner density) Sensor Check Execution This SP executes a check of all or one selected TD sensor. All Colors Select and press "Execute". K Display the results with SP2663 001 to 004 M C Y TD Sn Chk Disp Toner Density Sensor Check Execution Display Displays results of 2262. Vt is the most recent output of the TD sensor.
PAGE 538
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2302 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 Temp/Humid Disp Temperature/Humidity Display This SP displays the current temperature and humidity. These readings are output by the temperature humidity display located on the bottom of the machine below the waste toner bottle. Temp Disp Room temperature (oC). [0~100/1 deg.] Rel Humidity Disp Relative humidity (saturation point at current temperature). [0~100/1 %rh.] Abs Humidity Disp Absolute humidity.
PAGE 539
April, 2007 2307 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 2308 001 002 003 004 2312 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Set Ptype Link Paper Type Link Setting For the copy mode selected, these SPs 1) switch the image transfer bias for each color and 2) switch the paper transfer and separation bias Norm [0~5/1] 0: Normal Paper Recycled Paper 1: Thick Paper Special Paper 2: OHP Color 1 3: Special Paper 1 Color 2 4: Special Paper 2 OHP 5: Special Paper 3 Thick Le
PAGE 540
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2313 2314 2315 011 012 013 014 016 017 018 020 021 022 023 025 026 027 2316 002 003 004 005 007 2381 006 011 April, 2007 Margin FC Bias Margin FC Bias: Setting for K This SP sets the image transfer bias for each in areas of the image where nothing is printed in the full-color mode. Set ProCon Bias Process Control: Bias Setting for K This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during the process control selfcheck.
PAGE 541
April, 2007 2382 006 011 2383 006 011 2384 006 011 2385 006 011 2391 2392 2393 012 013 014 015 022 023 024 025 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Ptype K:ML Paper Type K: ML This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during black-andwhite copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
PAGE 542
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2394 2395 012 013 014 015 022 023 024 025 2401 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2406 001 002 003 004 013 014 015 021 022 023 April, 2007 Ptype FC:MH Paper Type FC:MH This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during full-color copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image. Ptype FC:HH Paper Type FC:HH This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during full-color copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
PAGE 543
April, 2007 2411 007 012 2412 007 012 2413 007 012 2414 007 012 2415 007 012 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Size Coeff:Norm Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 1 These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 001 (Threshold 1) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode Applies to Side 1 of duplex page. Side1:Size :PTR [100~600/1%] Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
PAGE 544
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2421 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2422 001 002 003 004 2423 007 012 2424 April, 2007 LEdge Cor:Norm K Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black image transfer (ITB) 2) bias at image to paper transfer, and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
PAGE 545
April, 2007 2426 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2427 001 002 003 004 2428 007 012 2429 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES LEdgeCor:Norm FC Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using plain paper, and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation. Notes: These settings apply: • Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2427.
PAGE 546
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2431 2432 2433 007 008 009 012 013 014 2434 2435 007 008 009 012 013 014 April, 2007 Norm:K:LL Plain Paper: K Low Norm:K:ML Plain Paper: K Medium Low Norm:K:MM Plain Paper: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 547
April, 2007 2441 2442 2443 017 018 019 027 028 029 2444 2445 017 018 019 027 028 029 2501 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Norm:FC:LL Plain Paper: FC Low Norm:FC:ML Plain Paper: FC Medium Low Norm:FC:MM Plain Paper: FC Medium Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 548
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2506 001 002 003 004 013 014 015 021 022 023 2511 007 012 2512 007 012 2513 007 012 2514 007 012 April, 2007 Set Bias:Thk:FC Set Bias for Thick Paper: FC This SP sets the following items with printing full-color on thick paper: 1) the image transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer for each color, 2) the ITB image to paper transfer, 3) DC/AC paper separation voltages for both sides duplex sheets. ITB:K [0~500/0.1 µA] ITB:M [0~500/0.1 µA] ITB:C [0~500/0.
PAGE 549
April, 2007 2515 007 012 2521 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2522 001 002 003 004 2523 007 012 2524 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Size Coeff:Thk Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper These settings 1) apply to paper widths up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed: 128 to 256 g/m²).
PAGE 550
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2526 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2527 001 002 003 004 2528 007 012 2529 002 April, 2007 LEdge Cor:Thk:FC Leading Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using thick paper (128~256 g/m2), and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation. Notes: These settings apply: • Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2527.
PAGE 551
April, 2007 2531 2532 2533 007 008 009 012 013 014 2534 2535 007 008 009 012 013 014 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Thk:K:LL Thick Paper: K Low Thk:K:ML Thick Paper: K Medium Low Thk:K:MM Thick Paper: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001 SP2431 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1 SP2432 – More than SP2304 0
PAGE 552
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2541 2542 2543 017 018 019 027 028 029 2544 2545 017 018 019 027 028 029 2601 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 Thk:FC:LL Thick Paper: FC Low Thk:FC:ML Thick Paper: FC Medium Low Thk:FC:MM Thick Paper: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 553
April, 2007 2606 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 2611 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES OHP FC Bias Set Bias for Transparency: K This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP in the full-color mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB for each color, 2) image transfer from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB. ITB: K [0~500/0.1 µA] ITB: M [0~500/0.1 µA] ITB: C [0~500/0.1 µA] ITB: Y [-100~0/0.1 µA] PTR [0~100/0.1 µA] SepDC [0~100/0.1 µA] SepAC [80~120/0.
PAGE 554
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2623 2624 2626 2627 001 002 003 004 2628 002 2629 002 April, 2007 TEdge Cor:OHP K – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: K Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in black-and-white mode on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
PAGE 555
April, 2007 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 002 003 004 002 003 004 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 007 008 009 007 008 009 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES OHP:K:LL Transparency: K Low OHP:K:ML Transparency: K Medium Low OHP:K:MM Transparency: K Medium OHP:K:MH Transparency: K Medium High OHP:K:HH Transparency: K High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the t
PAGE 556
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2751 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2756 001 002 003 004 013 014 015 021 022 023 April, 2007 Sp1 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 1: K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
PAGE 557
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES These SPs (SP2761~SP2765) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special Paper 1 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh).
PAGE 558
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2773 007 012 2774 002 2776 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2777 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 TEdge Cor:Sp1 K Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper by setting the start timing for SP2774 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1 only.
PAGE 559
April, 2007 2778 007 012 2779 2781 2782 2783 007 008 009 012 013 014 2784 2785 007 008 009 012 013 014 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES TEdge Cor:Sp1 FC – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 1.
PAGE 560
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2791 2792 2973 007 008 009 012 013 014 2794 2795 017 018 019 027 028 029 2801 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 April, 2007 Sp1:FC:LL Special Paper 1: FC Low Sp1:FC:ML Special Paper 1: FC Medium Low Sp1:FC:MM Special Paper 1: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 561
April, 2007 2806 001 002 003 004 013 014 015 021 022 023 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Sp2 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 2: FC These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
PAGE 562
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2821 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2822 001 002 003 004 2823 007 012 2824 002 April, 2007 LEdge Cor:Sp2:K Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: K Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed by the seting of SP2822 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and white copying on Special Paper 2.
PAGE 563
April, 2007 2826 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2827 001 002 003 004 2828 007 012 2829 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES LEdge Cor:Sp2 FC Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: FC These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 2 in the fullcolor mode: 1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
PAGE 564
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2831 2832 2833 007 008 009 012 013 014 2834 2835 007 008 009 012 013 014 April, 2007 Sp2:K:LL Special Paper 2: K Low Sp2:K:ML Special Paper 2: K Medium Low Sp2:K:MM Special Paper 2: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
PAGE 565
April, 2007 2841 2842 2843 017 018 019 027 028 029 2844 2845 017 018 019 027 028 029 2851 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Sp2:FC:LL Special Paper 2: FC Low Sp2:FC:ML Special Paper 2: FC Medium Low Sp2:FC:MM Special Paper 2: FC Medium These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to
PAGE 566
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2856 001 002 003 004 013 014 015 021 022 023 April, 2007 Sp3 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 3: K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
PAGE 567
April, 2007 2871 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2872 001 002 003 004 2873 007 012 2874 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES LEdge Cor:Sp3:K Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: K Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed by the seting of SP2872 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and white copying on Special Paper 3.
PAGE 568
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2876 001 007 008 009 012 013 014 2877 001 002 003 004 2878 007 012 2879 April, 2007 LEdge Cor:Sp3 FC Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: FC These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 3 in the fullcolor mode: 1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
PAGE 569
April, 2007 2881 2882 2883 007 008 009 012 013 014 2884 2885 007 008 009 012 013 014 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Sp3:K:LL Special Paper 3: K Low Sp3:K:ML Special Paper 3: K Medium Low Sp3:K:MM Special Paper 3: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 570
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2891 2892 2893 017 018 019 027 028 029 2894 2895 017 018 019 027 028 029 2901 001 002 003 004 2902 April, 2007 Sp3:FC:LL Special Paper 3: FC Low Sp3:FC:ML Special Paper 3: FC Medium Low Sp3:FC:MM Special Paper 3: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
PAGE 571
April, 2007 2903 001 002 003 004 2904 001 002 003 2905 001 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Env Thresh:K_PCU Room Temperature Correction Threshold: PCU This SP sets the threshold value of LL and ML for the current room temperature. Abs Humid:Thresh1 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3] Abs Humid:Thresh2 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3] Abs Humid:Thresh3 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3] Abs Humid:Thresh4 [0~10,000 / 0.
PAGE 572
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 Group 3000 3001 001 002 003 004 3002 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 TD Sn:Vt Display TD Sensor: Vt Display Displays the current value of Vt (output voltage of the TD sensor). This is the value that the machine uses to calculate the density of the toner in each development unit. The toner density is checked after every page prints. The TD sensor output voltage is inversely proportional to the toner density: • If toner density is high, the voltage is low.
PAGE 573
April, 2007 3003 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 3021 001 002 003 004 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Vtref:Disp/Set Set/Display Vtref This SP displays the TD sensor target voltage. This target voltage is inversely proportional to the density of the toner: • If the target is high, toner density is lowered. • If the target is low, toner density is raised.
PAGE 574
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3042 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 3101 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 Set Vtref Cor Set Vtref Correction Vtref is frequently updated in the toner supply cycle to stabiize the concentration of toner in the developer. Vtref is corrected between every printed page in the paper path using the correction amounts listed below for each color. This is the default setting (0) for SP3042 001. However, you can use this SP to switch this function OFF.
PAGE 575
April, 2007 3111 001 002 003 3121 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 3131 001 002 003 004 3141 001 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ID Sn:Voffset Voffset Value Detected by ID Sensor DFU Displays the output voltage of the directly reflected light when the LED of the ID sensor is switched OFF. Voffset_Reg:Col:F [0~500/0 V] Voffset_Dif:Col:F Voffset_Reg:K:R Adjusted Vsg Vsg Reading After Vsg Adjustment This SP displays the 1) results of the most recent Vsg adjustment, 2) averaged value of recent Vsg adjustments.
PAGE 576
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3194 001 002 005 006 3251 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 April, 2007 ID Coeff Display ID Sensor Sensitivity Coefficient Display Displays the most recent and averaged readings of the sensitivity correction coeffients (K2 and K5).
PAGE 577
April, 2007 3303 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 3304 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Tnr Supply Rate Toner Supply Rate: Display Displays for confirmation the toner supply rate of toner supply control using the PID method. The toner supply rate is calculated as: Toner Supply Rate = Toner Supply Time/Time Allowed for Toner Supply x 100 where: • Time is measured in msec.
PAGE 578
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3401 3411 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 April, 2007 TE Detect Set Detect/No Setting DFU These SP codes modify the operation of the toner end sensor. Switches toner end OFF and ON. [0~1/1] 0:Detect, 1: No Detect TE Pgs Min:K Use this SP to set the number of pages to print after the toner near-end alert has been issued.
PAGE 579
April, 2007 3501 001 002 003 004 005 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Select ProCon Select Process Control Method The settings of these SP codes modify the operation of the automatic process control self-check. Automatic process control is done at these times: • When the machine is turned ON • At the end of the job, if the number of pages since the previous process contro, exceeds the value of SP 3551 • Before ACC adjustment • When the developer is initialized with SP3811.
PAGE 580
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 006 DevGamma(EnvCorrct) 007 DevGamma(TimeCorrct) 3511 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 April, 2007 Switches correction of the development gamma adjustment with the readings of the temperature/humidity sensor OFF and ON. Press either the "OFF" or "ON" button to toggle the setting. Switches the timing of the development gamma adjustment during process control OFF and ON. Press either the "OFF" or "ON" button to toggle the setting.
PAGE 581
April, 2007 3531 001 002 003 004 3551 001 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ProCon Target Set Target Amount for Process Control This SP sets the value for the maximum coverage to be achieved by the process control self-check. Process control then analyzes the readings of the 10-grade pattern, calculates the potentials required for develoment gamma and Vk (starting voltage), and then determines the drum charge levels, development biases, and LD power levels necessary to achieve the target coverage.
PAGE 582
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3562 3563 001 002 003 004 3571 001 002 003 004 3572 001 002 003 004 April, 2007 Display Vk Display Vk (Development Start Voltage) Displays Vk, the development start voltage. This development start voltage is used to indicate whether the developer has deteriorated. However, this is only a rough measurement due to other factors: • A low threshold setting for the target development gamma.
PAGE 583
April, 2007 3573 3574 001 002 003 004 3575 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 3576 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Target Poten:Vd Display Target Potential (VdDisplay) Vd (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of dark areas of a drum before full laser exposure. This SP displays the value of Vd used by processing control to determine the target potential (Vd).
PAGE 584
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3577 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 3581 001 002 003 004 006 007 008 009 April, 2007 Chrg AC Control Display Value for Control of Development AC Displays the ac bias that was referenced during processing control and used in the previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.
PAGE 585
April, 2007 3801 001 002 003 004 005 006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Init TD Sensor Execute TD Sensor Initialization Do this SP after replacing the developer in one or more of the PCUs when servicing the machine. This SP: • Checks for the presence of developer in the development unit. (This ensures that the film seal has been removed from the developer pack.) • Initializes TD sensor. (Calibrates Vtcnt). • Calibrates development gamma and calibrates toner density. Also does the MUSIC check and correction.
PAGE 586
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3811 001 002 003 004 005 006 April, 2007 DevSetup Execute Execute Developer Setup Do this SP during the installation procedure after the developer and toner cartridges have been installed in the machine, or after the drum and cleaning blade have been replaced. This SP: • Confirms that all the seals have been removed from each developer cartridge and developer is present in each PCU. • Switches ON toner supply and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU.
PAGE 587
April, 2007 3820 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Manual ProCon Execute Process Control Manually Use this SP to execute process control manually. 3820 001 does potential control only. 3820 002 does potential control and toner density adjustment. Note: • You must do SP3820 to enable any values you change with SP3531 (Procon Target). • Use SP3561 to display the resuls of SP3820 execution.
PAGE 588
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 Group 4000 4008 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. [-10~+10/0.1%] 4010 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the subscan direction. [-30~+30/0.
PAGE 589
April, 2007 4020 001 002 003 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Dust Check Set for Dust Check on ADF Exposure Glass These SP codes adjust the dust check operation at the ADF scanning glass and the white scanning belt. Note: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on. Dust Detect:On/Off Switches the dust warning ON and OFF.
PAGE 590
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4400 001 002 003 004 005 007 008 April, 2007 Org Edge Mask Set the Mask for Original This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning. [0~30/0.1 mm] Book:Sub:LEdge Book:Sub:TEdge Book:Main:LEdge Book:Main:Tedge ADF:Sub:LEdge ADF:Main:TEdge ADF:Main:TEdge 4417 IPU Test Pattern Set IPU Test Pattern Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print.
PAGE 591
April, 2007 4501 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ACC Target Den ACC Target Notch Density This SP sets the target density for the ACC adjustment for machines connected with the Copy Connector (B328). For more see "4.2.5 Color Adjustment for Connected Copiers".
PAGE 592
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 These SPs (SP4550~SP4562) allow adjustments for the MTF(Modulation Transfer Function) level, smoothing, brightness and contrast of the scanning applications used on the document server (scan-to-email, scan-to-folder).
PAGE 593
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4609 4610 4611 White Plate:R Standard White Plate Adjustment: Red DFU White Plate:G Standard White Plate Adjustment: Green DFU White Plate:B Standard White Plate Adjustmetn: Blue DFU This SP codes display the reference voltages stored in NVRAM at the factory for Red, Green, and Blue before the machine was shipped. The SBU acquires these settings every time the machine is switched ON.
PAGE 594
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4646 001 002 April, 2007 Scan Auto Error Error Flag for Automatic Adjustment: Scanning DFU This SP sets the error flag to display as the SBU is updated automatically when the machine is switched ON.
PAGE 595
April, 2007 4691 001 002 005 006 4692 001 002 4693 001 002 003 004 4694 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 4695 001 002 003 004 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES White Lvl Peak:G White Level Peak: Green Scan Data DFU When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white level peak GREEN or black-and-white data after white level detection (AGC) after the machine is switched ON.
PAGE 596
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4800 001 002 003 4902 001 002 003 004 005 006 April, 2007 DF Density Adj ADF Density Adjustment This SP adjusts the white shading parameter for scanning an image with the ADF. Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs from the DF and Platen mode are different. :R [1~200/1] :G [1~200/1] :B [1~200/1] Disp ACC Data Display ACC Data This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
PAGE 597
April, 2007 4932 001 002 003 004 4954 001 002 004 4991 001 4992 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES MainScan Dot Adj Main Scan Dot Position Adjustment Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD. R:Left [0~9/1] R:Right B:Left B:Right Read/Restore Std Chart Standard: Read/Restore Use this SP to calibrate the scanner gamma on each machine connected with the Copy Connector (B328).
PAGE 598
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 5000 5024 mm/inch Display Selection Selects the unit of measurement. After selection, turn the main power switch off and on. [0~1/1] 0: mm 1: inch 5045 Accounting Counter Counter Method Selects the counting method. Note: You can change the setting only one time. [0 to 1/ 1] 0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K). 1: Paper counter.
PAGE 599
August, 2006 5113 001 002 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Optional Counter Type (Not Used) Default Optional Counter Type Selects the type of counter: 0: None 1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only 2: Key card down 3: Pre-paid card 4: Coin Lock 5: MF key card 11: Exp Key Card (Add) 12: Exp Key Card (Deduct) External Optional Counter Type Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external device for user access control. Note: “SDK” refers to software on an SD card.
PAGE 600
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5127 APS Mode This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine. [0~1/1] 0: On 1: Off 5128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option Japan Only 5131 Set Paper Size Set Paper Size Handling Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper).
PAGE 601
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5162 App. Switch Method Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software switch. [0~1/1] 0: Soft Key Set 1: Hard Key Set 5169 CE Login If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode. [0~1/1] 0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted. 1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
PAGE 602
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5307 001 002 003 5401 200 201 210 211 220 221 5404 August, 2006 Summer Time Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you set these items: - Day and time to go forward automatically in April. - Day and time to go back automatically in October. - Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
PAGE 603
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5501 PM Alarm Sets the count level for the PM alarm. [0~9999/1] 0: Alarm disabled The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by 1,000.
PAGE 604
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 023 Door Operation: Time Length 5513 Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only 001 Normal Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies. [1~999/1 K] 002 DF Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned originals.
PAGE 605
August, 2006 5801 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 014 015 016 017 5802 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Memory Clear Memory Clear Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing this SP, print an SMC Report. All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below. Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings. SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
PAGE 606
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5803 Input Chk Input Check (Mainframe) ( 5.6.1) 5804 Output Chk Output Check ( 5.6.2) 5810 Cancel Fusing SC Cancel Fusing SC Code When the machine issues one of the "Level A" SC codes shown below, this indicates a serious problem in the fusing unit. The machine is disabled and the operator cannot reset the SC. The machine requires servicing immediately. Use this SP code to release the machine for servicing.
PAGE 607
August, 2006 5816 001 002 003 006 007 008 009 010 011 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Remote Service (Not Used) I/F Setting Turns the remote diagnostics off and on. [0~2/1] 0: Remote diagnostics off. 1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on. 2: Network remote diagnostics. CE Call Lets the service engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or NRS; to do this, press the center report key. Function Flag Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network.
PAGE 608
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5821 001 002 August, 2006 Remote Service Address (Japan Only) CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After you change this setting, you must turn the machine off and on. RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center. [00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1] 5824 NVRAM Data Upload Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card (B6455010). Press Execute.
PAGE 609
August, 2006 090 TELNET Operation Settings 091 Web Operation 096 Rendezvous Operation 5832 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 5833 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled, the Telnet port is closed. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Disables or enables the Web operation. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation.
PAGE 610
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5836 001 002 003 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 081 082 083 August, 2006 Capture Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Panel Setting Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
PAGE 611
August, 2006 084 085 086 091 092 093 094 095 097 098 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Format for Printer Color [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Default for JPEG [5~95/1] Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format.
PAGE 612
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5839 004 007 008 009 010 011 012 August, 2006 IEEE 1394 (Not Used) This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed. Host Name Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000 Cycle Master Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
PAGE 613
August, 2006 013 5840 006 007 011 5841 001 002 002 004 011 012 013 021 022 023 5842 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Login MAX Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits) [0~63/1] 0: Reserved 63: Reserved IEEE 802.11b (Not Used) Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries. [1~14/1] Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN.
PAGE 614
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5844 001 002 003 004 August, 2006 USB Transfer Rate Sets the speed for USB data transmission. [Full Speed] [Auto Change] Vendor ID Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU Product ID Sets the product ID. [0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU Device Release No. Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display. [0000~9999/1] DFU Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD.
PAGE 615
August, 2006 010 011 5846 001 002 003 006 007 008 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Delivery Svr. Capability Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
PAGE 616
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 010 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 090 091 094 August, 2006 LDAP Search Timeout Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server. [1~255/1] Initialize Local Address Book Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed with UCS. Initialize Delivery Info. Press [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery address book that is controlled by UCS. Initialize LDAP Info.
PAGE 617
August, 2006 5847 001 002 003 004 005 006 021 5848 001 002 003 004 005 009 011 021 022 041 100 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Net File Resolution Reduction 5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1] 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile. “NetFile” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the DeskTopBinder software.
PAGE 618
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5849 001 002 August, 2006 Installation Date Displays or prints the installation date of the machine. Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”. Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter. [0~1/1] 0: No Print 1: Print 5853 Stamp Data Download Press [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk.
PAGE 619
August, 2006 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 5858 001 002 003 004 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key) Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD Card. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified.
PAGE 620
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5859 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 5860 020 021 022 025 August, 2006 Debug Log Save Function Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board. ( 5.10) Key 2 [-9999999~9999999/1] Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 10 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1~168/1] Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
PAGE 621
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5871 HDD Function Disable Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the setting. [0~1/1] 0: OFF 1: ON Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C (B735). For more, see section “1. Installation”. 5873 SD Card Apli. Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see "1.15.
PAGE 622
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the “Original Type” key and “#” key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
PAGE 623
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5967 Copy Server: Set Function Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.[0~1/1] 0: ON 1: OFF 5974 Cherry Server Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full (Professional)”, is installed.
PAGE 624
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 6000 6006 001 ADF Reg Adj ADF Main Reg Adj 003 ADF Sub Reg Adj 005 ADF Buck Adj:Front 006 ADF Buck Adj:Back 007 ADF TEdge EMargin ADF Registration Adjustment Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front/back in ADF mode. [–3~+3/0.1 mm] Adjusts the vertical registration for the front/back in ADF mode. [–30 ~+30/0.17 mm] -30 = -5.1 mm +30 = +5.1 mm Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller.
PAGE 625
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6020 ADF Skew Adj ARDF Skew Adjustment at the Scanning Entrance Roller This SP switches on stopping the scanning entrance roller for all paper sizes. Normally, the scanning entrance roller stops briefly to correct skew of small paper sizes in the ADF paper path and for the 2nd side scanning of originals during duplexing. Setting this SP to "1" sets the ADF to stop the scanning entrance roller for all paper sizes to correct for skew a second time.
PAGE 626
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6102 001 002 003 004 005 August, 2006 Adj Punch Pos 2 Punch Position Adjustment Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. [-20~+20/0.4 mm] + Value: Shifts punch unit toward back of the finisher. - Value: Shift punch unit toward front of the finisher. 2-Hole:DOM 3-Hole:NA 4-Hole:EU 4-Hole:SCAN 2-Hole:NA Paper Feed B132S922.
PAGE 627
August, 2006 6104 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 6105 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 6106 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Punch Hole Reg 2 Punch Hole Control This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when paper enters the finisher. A3 SEF [0~2/1] 0: No adjustment. Quickly restores the default setting of you B4 SEF forget what the other settings do.
PAGE 628
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6107 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 August, 2006 Interposer Size Paper Size Priority: Cover Interposer Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray.
PAGE 629
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6111 Adj Z-Fold 2 Adjust Fold Position: Z-Fold Unit: Fold 2 Japan Only Adjusts the position of the second fold for the Z-folding unit. 6112 Book Staple Adj Adjust Booklet Stapling Position Japan Only This SP corrects the stapling postion of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled and folded. A3 SEF [-75~+75/0.5 mm] + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease. B4 SEF - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
PAGE 630
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 6115 Max Prestack Number of Pre-Stack Sheets This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. With this SP set to the default (3): • 3 sheets are sent to the pre-stack tray. • When the 4th sheet feeds, the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from the pre-stack tray are sent to the stapling tray together Note: You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper.
PAGE 631
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6121 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) ( 5.8.1) These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701. 6122 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) ( 5.9.1) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 6123 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) ( 5.8.2) These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
PAGE 632
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6126 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 6900 August, 2006 Book Fold Adj Adjusts the booklet folding position These SPs adjust the position for booklet stapling with the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher B700. The initial setting is at "0" and can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm A3 SEF:Sub Scan [-3 to +3/0.
PAGE 633
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 7000 7001 Op Time Disp Main Motor Operation Time Displays the total drum rotation time. 7401 Total SC Counter Total SC Counter Displays the total number of SCs logged. 7403 SC History 001 Latest 002 Latest 1st 003 Latest 2nd 004 Latest 3rd 005 Latest 4th 006 Latest 5th 007 Latest 6th 008 Latest 7th 009 Latest 8th 010 Latest 9th Displays the latest 10 SC codes. 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams.
PAGE 634
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7504 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 016 019 020 021 022 023 024 034 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 066 069 071 072 074 078 084 098 099 August, 2006 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Copier Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
PAGE 635
August, 2006 7504 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 7504 141 142 143 144 145 148 149 150 151 153 155 156 157 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher (Japan Only) Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
PAGE 636
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7504 161 162 163 164 165 7504 166 167 168 7504 171 172 173 174 175 176 179 180 181 182 183 185 186 August, 2006 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Mail Box B762 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
PAGE 637
August, 2006 7504 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 7504 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 223 224 225 226 227 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
PAGE 638
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7504 230 7505 001 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 August, 2006 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Location – All Finishers Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
PAGE 639
August, 2006 7506 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 005 006 014 038 044 132 133 134 141 142 160 164 166 172 255 Jam Count by Paper Size Displays the total number of jams by paper size. A4 LEF Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
PAGE 640
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7617 001 002 Parts PM Counter Display Normal Japan Only DF Japan Only 7618 001 PM Parts Counter Reset Japan Only Normal Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the main machine. DF Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the ADF. 002 7801 ROM Ver ROM Version Numbers Displays the ROM version numbers of the main machine and connected peripheral devices.
PAGE 641
August, 2006 7835 001 002 7836 7852 001 002 7901 001 002 003 7931 7932 7933 7934 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 020 021 022 023 050 051 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ACC Counter No information is available at this time. Copy ACC Printer ACC Total Memory Size Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board. ADF Scan Glass ADF Scan Glass Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected dust on the ARDF scanning glass at the beginning of copy jobs.
PAGE 642
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7935 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 7936 7937 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 7999 August, 2006 MotdrvtimeDisp Motor Drive Time Display These SPs display the total drive times for each of motor listed below. The 8-digit display shows the total in minutes.
PAGE 643
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 8000 Current Status of the SP8xxx Counters Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information. SP Numbers SP8 211~SP8 216 SP8 401~SP8 406 SP8 691~SP8 696 What They Do The number of pages scanned to the document server.
PAGE 644
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 8 Service Table Keys Many of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean. PREFIXES T: Total: (Grand Total). C: P: S: L: Copy application. Print application. Scan application.
PAGE 645
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
PAGE 646
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ABBREVIATION Ppr PrtJam PrtPGS R Rez SC Scn Sim, Simplex S-to-Email SMC Svr TonEnd TonSave TXJob YMC YMCK August, 2006 WHAT IT MEANS Paper Printer (plotter) Jam Print Pages Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currently not available. (Not Used) Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Simplex, printing on 1 side. Scan-to-E-mail SMC report printed with SP5990.
PAGE 647
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES SP8-xxx: Data Log2 8 001 8 002 8 004 8 005 8 006 T:Total Jobs C:Total Jobs P:Total Jobs S:Total Jobs L:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. [0~9999999/ 1] Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server, plus the number of times a file already on the document server is used.
PAGE 648
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 011 8 012 8 014 8 015 8 016 8 017 T:Jobs/LS C:Jobs/LS P:Jobs/LS S:Jobs/LS L:Jobs/LS O:Jobs/LS August, 2006 These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each application, to reveal how local storage is being used for input. [0~9999999/ 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. • When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
PAGE 649
August, 2006 8 031 8 032 8 034 8 035 8 036 8 037 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:Pjob/DesApl C:Pjob/DesApl P:Pjob/DesApl S:Pjob/DesApl L:Pjob/DesApl O:Pjob/DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server. [0~9999999/ 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
PAGE 650
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 061 T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application. 8 062 C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. 8 064 P:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application.
PAGE 651
August, 2006 8 071 8 072 8 074 8 075 8 076 8 077 8 07x 1 8 07x 2 8 07x 3 8 07x 4 8 07x 5 8 07x 6 8 07x 7 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
PAGE 652
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 131 8 131 1 8 131 2 8 131 3 8 135 8 135 1 8 135 2 8 131 3 August, 2006 T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. B/W Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white. Color Count for the number of jobs with color. ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
PAGE 653
August, 2006 8 141 8 141 1 8 141 2 8 141 3 8 143 3 8 145 8 145 1 8 145 2 8 145 3 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. B/W Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white. Color Count for the number of jobs with color. ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode. ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
PAGE 654
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 191 8 192 8 195 8 196 T:Total Scan PGS C:Total Scan PGS S:Total Scan PGS L:Total Scan PGS August, 2006 These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. [0~9999999/ 1] • SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages. • These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color. • Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
PAGE 655
August, 2006 8 201 8 205 8 20x 1 8 20x 2 8 211 8 212 8 215 8 216 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
PAGE 656
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 221 8 221 1 8 221 2 August, 2006 ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning. Front Number of front sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
PAGE 657
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. 8 242 C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs. 8 245 S:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
PAGE 658
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 251 8 252 8 254 8 256 8 257 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt August, 2006 These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each application. Some examples of these editing features are: • Erase> Border • Erase> Center • Image Repeat • Centering • Positive/Negative [0~9999999/ 1] Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used.
PAGE 659
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp 8 295 8 296 S:Scan PGS/Stamp L:Scan PGS/Stamp 8 301 T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441]. C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application.
PAGE 660
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 311 8 315 8 31x 1 8 31x 2 8 31x 3 8 31x 4 8 31x 5 August, 2006 T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.
PAGE 661
August, 2006 8 391 8 391 1 8 391 2 8 401 8 402 8 404 8 405 8 406 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. A3/DLT, Larger A2, Larger Not supported with this printer. T:PrtPGS/LS C:PrtPGS/LS P:PrtPGS/LS S:PrtPGS/LS L:PrtPGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server.
PAGE 662
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
PAGE 663
August, 2006 8 431 8 432 8 434 8 436 8 437 8 43x 1 8 43x 2 8 43x 3 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application.
PAGE 664
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 441 8 442 8 444 8 445 8 446 8 447 8 44x 1 8 44x 2 8 44x 3 8 44x 4 8 44x 5 8 44x 6 8 44x 7 8 44x 8 8 44x 9 8 44x 10 8 44x 100 8 44x 101 8 44x 254 8 44x 255 August, 2006 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
PAGE 665
August, 2006 8 451 8 451 1 8 451 2 8 451 3 8 451 4 8 451 5 8 451 6 8 451 7 8 451 8 8 451 9 8 451 10 8 461 8 462 8 464 8 466 8 46x 1 8 46x 2 8 46x 3 8 46x 4 8 46x 5 8 46x 6 8 46x 7 8 46x 8 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. Bypass Bypass Tray Tray 1 Copier Tray 2 Copier Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option) Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option) Tray 5 LCT (Option) Tray 6 Currently not used. Tray 7 Currently not used.
PAGE 666
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 471 8 471 1 8 471 2 8 471 3 8 471 4 8 471 5 August, 2006 PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. ~49% 50%~99% 100% 101%~200% 201% ~ • Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well.
PAGE 667
August, 2006 8 491 8 492 8 496 8 496 1 8 496 2 8 496 3 8 496 4 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages output by the Copy, document server, and Fax applications. C:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total output by the Copy application only L:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
PAGE 668
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 511 T:PrtPGS/Emul 8 514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
PAGE 669
August, 2006 8 521 8 522 8 524 8 525 8 526 8 52x 1 8 52x 2 8 52x 3 8 52x 4 8 52x 5 8 52x 6 8 52x 7 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application. P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application.
PAGE 670
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 581 8 581 1 8 581 2 8 581 3 8 581 4 8 581 5 8 581 6 8 581 7 8 581 8 8 581 9 8 581 10 8 581 11 8 582 8 582 1 8 582 2 8 582 003 8 582 4 8 584 8 584 1 8 584 2 8 584 3 August, 2006 T:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
PAGE 671
August, 2006 8 586 8 586 1 8 586 2 8 586 3 8 586 4 8 591 8 591 1 8 591 2 8 591 3 8 651 8 651 1 8 651 2 8 655 8 655 1 8 655 2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES L:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total output broken down by color for output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
PAGE 672
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 661 8 661 1 8 661 2 8 665 8 665 1 8 665 2 8 666 8 666 1 8 666 2 August, 2006 T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. B/W Color Supported by Color MFP machines only. S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application. B/W Color Supported by Color MFP machines only.
PAGE 673
August, 2006 8 691 8 692 8 694 8 695 8 696 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES T:TX PGS/LS C:TX PGS/LS P:TX PGS/LS S:TX PGS/LS L:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server. The counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented. [0~9999999/ 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
PAGE 674
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 741 8 741 1 8 741 2 8 741 3 8 741 4 8 741 5 8 771 8 771 1 8 771 2 8 771 3 8 771 4 8 771 5 8 771 6 8 781 8 781 1 8 781 2 8 781 3 8 781 4 8 791 1 8 801 8 801 1 8 801 2 8 801 3 8 801 4 8 801 5 August, 2006 RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them.
PAGE 675
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8831 001 002 003 004 Pixel Cover Ave. Accum. Ave. K Accum. Ave. M Accum. Ave. C Accum. Ave.
PAGE 676
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 891 8 891 1 8 891 2 8 891 3 8 891 4 8 941 8 941 1 8 941 2 8 941 3 8 941 4 8 941 5 8 941 6 8 941 7 8 941 8 8 941 9 August, 2006 Pages: Current Toner [0~65 535] These SPs count the number of pages for the current set toner. K Black toner M Magenta toner C Cyan toner Y Yellow toner Machine Status [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode.
PAGE 677
August, 2006 8 951 8 951 1 8 951 2 8 951 3 8 951 4 8 951 5 8 951 6 8 951 7 8 951 8 8 951 9 8 951 10 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES AddBook Register These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration. [0~9999999/ 1] User Code User code registrations. Mail Address Mail address registrations. Fax Destination Fax destination registrations. Group Group destination registrations. Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX. F-Code F-Code box registrations.
PAGE 678
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 9000 9405 001 System Stop Ctrl Setting System Stop Control ON/OFF Setting of the System Stop Control Function. Switches the System Stop Control Function ON or OFF. When this switch is ON: The machine stops the job when the output of the temperature/humidity sensor on the K-PCU is 41°C (105.8F) or higher. Note: This keeps the temperature of the toner in the development unit below 50°C (122F), which prevents toner clumping and other machine failures.
PAGE 679
August, 2006 9407 001 Environ Cntrl Environ Cntrl 004 005 006 007 Op Humidity Stop Humidity Op On Time Op Off Time SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Enable/disables the Peltier unit. [0 to 1 / 1] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. IMPOTANT: • As a general rule, keep this SP mode disabled. Enable this SP mode ONLY WHEN: 1.
PAGE 680
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE Group 1 (Printer) 1001 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 Bit Switch Bit Switch 1 Settings Bit Switch 2 Settings Bit Switch 3 Settings Bit Switch 4 Settings Bit Switch 5 Settings Bit Switch 6 Settings Bit Switch 7 Settings Bit Switch 8 Settings Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU 1003 Clear Setting 001 Initialize Printer System Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.
PAGE 681
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1103 Test Page Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment. 001 Color Gray Scale 002 Color Pattern 1104 001 002 003 004 021 022 023 024 041 042 043 044 061 062 063 064 1105 1106 Gamma Adjustment Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.
PAGE 682
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE Group 1 (Scanner) 1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [ 1 to 3 /1/step ] 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR 1005 Erase margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. [0 to 5/ 1 mm/step] 1007 Store Priority This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.
PAGE 683
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine. After you select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left. 1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5803. 2. Enter the number (1 to 13) for the item that you want to check.
PAGE 684
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 003 Paper Feed 3 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 0 1 See following table.
PAGE 685
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 005: Paper Feed 5 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input Right Tray Paper Sensor – Tray 1 Number of Trays Detected 0 1 No Paper 3-Trays Paper 4-Trays 006: Paper Feed 6 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input Tray 1 Set Sensor Rear Fence HP Sensor – Right Right Tray Down Sensor Rear Fence HP Sensor – Tray 1 Rear Fence Open Senor – Right Rear Fence Return Sensor – Tray 1 Paper End Sensor – Right Tray Right Tray Set Sensor –
PAGE 686
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 009: Used Toner Trans Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input 0 1 Off Off Off Off On On On On 0 Off Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On On Input LCT Relay Sensor Paper Exit Relay Sensor Registration Sensor Guide Plate Position Sensor 0 Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On Paper Exit Sensor Paper Exit Relay Sensor Off Off Off On On On 0 Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On WasteToner Lock Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Senso
PAGE 687
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 013: Paper Trans 4 Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input Paper Size Switch 1 Paper Size Switch 2 Paper Size Switch 3 Paper Size Switch 4 Bypass Paper Size Switch 0 1 See following table.
PAGE 688
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 015: PCU Motor Lock Bit Input Bit 7 PCU Motor Lock – Y Bit 6 PCU Motor Lock – M Bit 5 PCU Motor Lock – C Bit 4 PCU Motor Lock – K Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off: No Lock On: Locked 0 Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On 0 Off Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On On 0 Off Off Off 1 On On On 0 Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On 016: Other Motor Lock Bit Input Bit 7 ITB Drive Motor Lock Bit 6 PTR Motor Lock Bit 5 Fusing/Exit Motor Lock Bit 4 Waste Toner Transport Motor Lock Bit 3 Wa
PAGE 689
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 019: Fan System 3 Bit Input Bit 7 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 2 Lock Bit 6 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 1 Lock Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off: No Lock On: Locked 0 Off Off 1 On On 020: Hi Volt SC1 (Drum Charge Power Pack) Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input High Voltage Output: Y High Voltage Output: M High Voltage Output: C High Voltage Output: K 0 Normal Normal Normal Normal 1 Abnormal Abnormal Abnormal Abnormal 021:
PAGE 690
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 023: Paper Transfer Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input ITB Lift Sensor ITB Position Sensor 1 ITB Position Sensor 2 0 Separated 1 Contact See folloeing table.
PAGE 691
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 026: Set Detection Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input Key Card Set Key Count Set Mechanical Counter B Set Mechanical Counter FC Set Fusing Unit Set Duplex Unit Set Drawer Set 0 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On On On On Input 0 Off 1 On Input Peltier Unit Abnormal Peltier Unit Fan Motor 0 Off Off 1 On On 0 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 1 On On On On On On On On 027: Door Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
PAGE 692
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 1. Open SP mode 5804. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table on the next page.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical component switched on for a long time.
PAGE 693
August, 2006 5804 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 NOTE: Output Chk Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Nor Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Haf Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Nor Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Hi Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Haf Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Nor Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Haf Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Nor Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Hi Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Haf Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Nor Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Haf Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Nor Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Hi Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Haf Feed Mtr 4:Rev/Nor Feed Mtr 4:Re
PAGE 694
ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 1. Open SP mode SP6007. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table below.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
PAGE 695
August, 2006 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 1. Open SP mode SP6008. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table below.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing. 6008 001 002 003 004 005 006 ADF Output Chk ADF Output Check Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing.
PAGE 696
FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121 6121 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
PAGE 697
August, 2006 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123 6123 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
PAGE 698
FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122 6122 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
PAGE 699
August, 2006 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125 6125 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 Output Chk:Fin2 Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
PAGE 700
USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Service Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on. The Save Debug Log feature provides two main features: • Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval.
PAGE 701
August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG 4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press . COPY : SP-5-857-002 Save Debug Log Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card) _2_ Initial 2 NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the service slot. 5.
PAGE 702
USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Press “5859”. Under “5859” press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record. Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press . NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered. COPY : SP-5-859-001 Debug Save Key No.
PAGE 703
August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting: • Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web memory modules. • The initial settings are all zero. • These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
PAGE 704
USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other errors that occur while the service engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
PAGE 705
August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG 5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data.
PAGE 706
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11 USER TOOLS 5.11.1 OVERVIEW This section is a summary of the user tools. Refer to the operator’s manual for more details. 1. On the operation panel, press the User Tools button. 2. Press the appropriate key, then access the following items: • System Settings • Maintenance • Copier/Document Server Features • Printer Features • Scanner Features • Inquiry • Counter You can use these tools while the machine is operating, during a jam, or even when a warning is displayed.
PAGE 707
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.
PAGE 708
USER TOOLS August, 2006 System Settings Map (Continued) Timer Settings Auto Off Timer Energy Saver Timer Panel Off Timer System Reset Timer Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer Printer Auto Reset Timer Scanner Auto Reset Timer Set Date Set Time Weekly Timer Code Auto Logout Timer Weekly Timer: Monday Weekly Timer: Tuesday Weekly Timer: Wednesday Weekly Timer: Thursday Weekly Timer: Friday Weekly Timer: Saturday Weekly Timer: Sunday Interface Settings Network IP Address Gateway Address DNS Configuration
PAGE 709
August, 2006 USER TOOLS System Settings Map (Continued) Administrator Tools User Authentication Management Administrator Authentication Management Program/Change Administrator Key Counter Management External Charge Unit Management Extended Security Extend Change Unit Management Enhanced Extend Change Unit Management Display Print Counter Display/Clear/Print Counter Per User Address Book Management Address Book: Program/Change/Delete/Delete Group Address Book: Edit Title Address Book: Change Order Print Ad
PAGE 710
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Copier/Document Server Features" Copier/Document Server Features Map General Features Auto Paper Select Priority Paper Display Original Type Display Original Type Priority Original Photo Type Priority Auto Tray Switching Duplex Mode Priority Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode Original Orientation in Duplex Mode Max.
PAGE 711
August, 2006 USER TOOLS Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued) Edit Front Margin: Left/Right Back Margin: Left/Right Front Margin: Top/Bottom Back Margin: Top/Bottom 1-Sided Æ 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to T 1-Sided Æ 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to B Erase Border Width Erase Original Shadow in Combine Erase Center Width Copy Back Cover Front Cover Copy in Combine Orientation: Booklet, Magazine Copy Order in Combine Image Repeat Separation Line Double Copies Separation Line Separation Line in Combine Stamp
PAGE 712
USER TOOLS August, 2006 Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued) User Stamp Program/Delete Stamp Stamp Position: 1 Stamp Position: 2 Stamp Position: 3 Stamp Position: 4 Stamp Format: 1 Stamp Format: 2 Stamp Format: 3 Stamp Format: 4 Stamp Color: 1 Stamp Color: 2 Stamp Color: 3 Stamp Color: 4 Date Stamp Format Font Stamp Position Stamp Setting Size Superimpose Stamp Color Page Numbering Stamp Format Font Size Duplex Back Page Stamping Position Page Numbering in Combine Stamp on Designating Slip Shee
PAGE 713
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Printer Features" Printer Features Map List/Test Print Multiple Lists Config. Page Error Log Menu List PCL Config./Font Page PS Config./Font Page PDF Config.
PAGE 714
USER TOOLS August, 2006 Printer Features Map (Continued) PCL Menu Orientation Form Lines Font Source Font Number Point Size Font Pitch Symbol Set Courier Font Extend A4 Width Append CR to LF Resolution PS Menu Data Format Resolution Color Setting Color Profile 5-222
PAGE 715
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Scanner Features" Scanner Features Map Scan Settings Default Scan Settings Wait Time for Next Orig.
PAGE 716
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11.7 INQUIRY Key press: [User Tools]> "Inquiry" Consumables Machine Maintenance/Repair Toner Telephone No. Toner Serial No. of Machine Toner Toner Sales Representative Telephone No. Print Inquiry List To print the Inquiry List, press "Print Inquiry List", read the displayed message then press [Start] on the operation panel. 5.11.
PAGE 717
August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6. DETAILS 6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 9 33 10 11 32 Y 31 C M K 12 13 30 14 29 15 28 16 27 26 18 19 25 20 21 24 23 B132V102.
PAGE 718
GENERAL OVERVIEW August, 2006 1. Transport Belt (ARDF) 18. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray) 2. Entrance Roller (ARDF) 19. Feed Roller (Paper Tray) 3. Feed Belt (ARDF) 20. Separation Roller (Paper Tray) 4. Separation Roller (ARDF) 21. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray) 5. Pick-up Roller (ARDF) 22. Paper Size Switch (Tray 3) 6. Upper Inverter Roller (ARDF) 23. Universal Tray (Tray 3) 7. Lower Inverter Roller (ARDF) 24. Universal Tray (Tray 2) 8. Development Roller 25. Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) 9.
PAGE 719
August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY 3 2 1 4 9 5 8 B132V104.WMF 7 6 2. Cover Sheet Path 3. Original Path 4. Bypass Tray 5. LCT Feed 6. Vertical Transport Path 7. Duplex Transport Path 8. Finisher Lower Tray (Booklet) 9. Finisher Upper Tray 1 (Shift) 6-3 Detailed Descriptions 1.
PAGE 720
GENERAL OVERVIEW August, 2006 6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX 7 1 8 9 6 5 2 3 4 B132V105.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
PAGE 721
August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 20 19 18 11 12 17 13 16 14 B132V106.WMF 12. Fusing Exit Motor 13. Duplex Transport Motor 14. Paper Feed Motor 3 15. Paper Feed Motor 2 16. Lower Relay Motor 17. Paper Feed Motor 1 18. Bypass Feed Motor 19. Registration Motor 20. PTR Motor 21. ITB Drive Motor 1. Scanner Motor 2. PCU Motor – K 3. Drum Motor – K 4. PCU Motor – M 5. Drum Motor – M 6. PCU Motor – C 7. Drum Motor – C 8. PCU Motor – Y 9. Drum Motor – Y 10.
PAGE 722
BOARDS August, 2006 6.2 BOARDS 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM B132D981.
PAGE 723
August, 2006 BOARDS 6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit) The BICU is the main control board and controls these functions: • Engine sequence control (all sensors, motors, fusing temperature control circuits) • Image processing control (on the IPU) • Scanning control • GW controller interface • Peripheral timing control GW Controller and Mother Board The controller board controls all the options.
PAGE 724
BOARDS August, 2006 SBU (Sensor Board Unit) The SBU does the following: • Takes the analog signals from the CCD and converts them to digital. • Sends serial data to the BICU. • Sends signals from the main CPU to the SIOB, to control the scanner components. SIOB (Scanner I/O Board) This board controls all the sensors in the scanner unit and the scanner motor. The CPU controls this board through the interfaces on the SBU and the BICU.
PAGE 725
August, 2006 BOARDS 6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION [B] [C] [A] [A]: HDD cooling fan [B]: Controller box exhaust fan 1 [C]: Controller box exhaust fan 2 Three fans cool the PCBs in the controller box. The HDD cooling fan [A] pulls cool air into the bottom of the PCB box. The controller box exhaust fans [B] and [C] pull the hot air out of the top of the controller box. 6-9 Detailed Descriptions B132D968.
PAGE 726
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW August, 2006 6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW Y M C K B132D001.WMF This machine has four PCUs in a straight line: Y, M, C, K. • The ITB lift motor raises and lowers the ITB unit. • The ITB lift motor raises ITB for full-color copying. The drum of every PCU contacts the ITB below. • The ITB lift motor lowers the ITB for black-and-white copying. Only the black PCU (on the far right) contacts the ITB below.
PAGE 727
August, 2006 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 4 2 1 3 8 5 K 7 6 9 10 B132D984.WMF 1. DRUM CHARGE In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the drum. The charge stays on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark. 2. EXPOSURE A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is converted to a digital signal, processed, and stored in the memory.
PAGE 728
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW August, 2006 4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR The drum potential sensor in each PCU detects the drum potential. Changes in conditions near the drum (heat, humidity, drum condition) change the drum potential. The machine uses the output from this sensor to adjust the voltages that are used during auto process control. 5. DEVELOPMENT The magnetic developer brush of the development roller contacts the latent image on the drum surface.
PAGE 729
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4 ARDF 6.4.1 OVERVIEW 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10 11 12 13 27 26 14 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 B132D119.WMF 15 15. Lower Inverter Sensor 16. Upper Junction Gate 17. Exit Roller 18. Lower Inverter Roller 19. Exit Sensor 20. Lower Junction Gate 21. Scanning Exit Roller 22. ARDF Transport Belt 23. ARDF Exposure Glass 24. Registration Sensor 25. Scanning Entrance Roller 26. Interval Sensor 27. 1st Transport Roller 1. Original Width Sensors (x 5) 2. Entrance Roller 3.
PAGE 730
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Components View 1: Sensors 3 4 2 5 6 1 7 8 B5 A4 LG 14 13 10 12 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9 B132D106.WMF Original Width Sensors ( to ) Original Width Sensor 1 (for B6 SEF) Interval Sensor Skew Correction Sensor Separation Sensor Feed Cover Open Sensor Bottom Plate Position Sensor 6-14 8. Original Length Sensors (x3) 9. Original Set Sensor 10. Upper Inverter Sensor 11. Lower Inverter Sensor 12. Exit Sensor 13.
PAGE 731
August, 2006 ARDF Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other 2 1 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B132D107.WMF 7. ARDF Position Sensor 8. APS Start Sensor 9. Upper Inverter Motor 10. ARDF Transport Motor 11.
PAGE 732
ARDF August, 2006 ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors 2 3 1 4 5 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 6 Pick-up Motor Exit Motor Bottom Plate Lift Motor Upper Inverter Motor ARDF Transport Motor Lower Inverter Motor Feed Motor 6-16 B132D108.
PAGE 733
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION [A] [C] [D] [F] [B] [G] [H] [E] B132D110.WMF The original size is detected by 5 width sensors and 3 length sensors. B5 A4 LGL R 318 mm (12.5") 291 mm (11.5") Detailed Descriptions When the leading edge of the paper passes the skew correction sensor, the CPU reads the outputs from the original width sensors.
PAGE 734
ARDF August, 2006 Original Size Detection Table Size (W x L) A3 SEF (297 x 420 mm) B4 SEF (257 x 364 mm) A4 SEF (210 x 297 mm) A4 LEF (297 x 210 mm) B5 SEF (182 x 257 mm) B5 LEF (257 x 182 mm) A5 SEF (148 x 210 mm) *1 A5 LEF (210 x 148 mm) B6 SEF (128 x 182 mm) *1 B6 LEF (182 x 128 mm) *1 11" x 17" SEF (DLT) 11" x 15" SEF 10" x 14" SEF 81/2" x 14" SEF (LG) 81/2" x 13" SEF (F4) 81/4" x 13" SEF 8" x 13" SEF (F) 81/2" x 11" SEF (LT) 11" x 81/2" LEF (LT) 71/4" x 101/2" SEF 101/2" x 71/4" LEF 8" x 10" SEF (F)
PAGE 735
August, 2006 ARDF Changing the Default Selection with SP6016 and SP5126 Some original sizes are almost the same. The machine cannot detect a difference between these sizes. Because of this, you can force the machine to detect one size or the other size with SP6016. 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Select SP6016. On the screen you will see an 8-digit binary setting bar: 00000000 The default settings are all "0".
PAGE 736
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER [B] [A] [C] [D] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: B132D109.WMF Pick-up roller lift motor Cam Pick-up roller release lever Pick-up roller Bottom plate position sensor When there are no originals, the pick-up roller [D] stays up at the home position. When an original is put on the tray: • Original set sensor Æ On Æ Pick-up motor [A] Æ On. • Cam [B] releases lever [C] then pick-up roller [D] drops onto the paper.
PAGE 737
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT [B] [A] [C] B132D111.WMF When an original is placed on the original tray: • Original set sensor Æ On Æ pick-up roller drops • Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Æ Off. • Motor [A] lifts lever [B] and raises the bottom plate. When the bottom plate reaches the correct feed height for feeding: • Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Æ On Æ Stops bottom plate lift.
PAGE 738
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION [D] [B] [C] [A] B132D120.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Pick-up roller Feed belt Separation roller Separation sensor Because of this mechanism, the machine does not feed more than one sheet at a time.
PAGE 739
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] B132D120.WMF Skew correction sensor Entrance roller Feed roller (Transport Roller 1) Interval sensor Scanning entrance roller After pick-up and separation: • Skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original • The detection signal stops the entrance roller [B] for a set number of pulses to buckle the original and correct skew.
PAGE 740
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION [A] [B] B132D120.WMF [A]: Separation sensor [B]: Skew correction sensor These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for this. The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation sensor [A] after the [Start] key is pressed. • If the original arrives at the correct time, it feeds normally. • If the original arrives late, the machine enters the slip mode.
PAGE 741
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED) [E] [C] [D] [B] [A] [F] [G] [K] [H] B132D120.WMF [I] [J] The pick-up roller [A] feeds the original to the feed belt [B] and separation roller [C]. The feed motor increases the speed of 1st transport roller [F] to feed the paper faster and reduce the interval between the original that was just fed and the original ahead that is now being scanned.
PAGE 742
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING 3 1 [A] B132D112.WMF 1. Side 1 of original is scanned, original waits. Upper junction gate [A] opens and sends to the upper inverter rollers. 3 1 [C] [B] B132D113.WMF 2. Original feeds past the upper inverter rollers [B] and stops. Upper inverter junction gate [C] closes. The upper inverter rollers reverse and feed the original into the feed path. 3 1 [D] B132D114.WMF 3. Original feeds to rollers [D], where skew is corrected. ( 6.4.
PAGE 743
August, 2006 ARDF 3 1 2 [A] [B] B132D115.WMF 4. Side 2 of original is scanned, lower inverter junction gate [A] opens and directs to lower inverter table [B]. Original feeds. [D] [C] [F] [E] B132D117.WMF Detailed Descriptions 5. Steps 1, 2, 3 repeat for original . Lower inverter junction gate [C] and upper inverter junction gate [D] remain closed. Lower inverter rollers [E] feed original to exit rollers [F] B132D118.WMF 6.
PAGE 744
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION Jam Detection Sensor Layout [C] [B] [A] [D] [F] [E] [G] B132D119.WMF P1 P2 P3 B132D972.
PAGE 745
August, 2006 ARDF Jam Detection Table The following notations are used in the table below: • Orig. late: Leading edge not detected. The original fails to arrive at the sensor site at the correct time. • Orig. lag: Trailing edge not detected. The original fails to leave the sensor site at the correct time.
PAGE 746
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.1 OVERVIEW 2 1 5 4 3 6 7 8 9 10 16 15 14 13 12 11 B132D101A.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Scanner Motor 10. Scanner Fan Motor - Right 11. Lens Block 12. Polygon Motor 13. 1st Scanner 14. APS1 (Org. Width Sensors 1, 2) 15. 2nd Scanner 16. Scanner Fan Motor - Left Scanner HP Sensor ARDF Exposure Glass White Plate Exposure Lamp (Xenon) Exposure Glass APS2 (Org. Length Sensors 1, 2) APS3 (Org.
PAGE 747
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION [D] [A] [E] [B] [C] The machine uses five sensors on three APS boards to detect the size of the original on the exposure glass. [A]: APS1. (W1 and W2) detects original width [B]: APS2. (L1 and L2) detects original length [C]: APS3. (L3) detects original length [D]: ARDF position sensor. Detects whether the ARDF is open or closed. [E]: APS start sensor. Triggers automatic paper size detection. 6-31 Detailed Descriptions B132D102.
PAGE 748
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 L1 L2 L3 W1 W2 B132D973.WMF The table shows the sensor output for each paper size. If an original is on the exposure glass, you can check the sensor output with SP4301 (APS Confirm).
PAGE 749
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT Detection Timing When the power is on, the APS sensors are always active, but the CPU checks their signals only after the platen is lowered. Book Mode In the Book mode (when the ARDF is open), the CPU checks the APS sensors and determines the original size after [Start] is pressed. ARDF Mode The CPU checks the APS sensors after the platen is lowered.
PAGE 750
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE [D] [C] [B] [A] B132D103.WMF [A]: Scanner motor (a dc stepper motor) drives the 1st and 2nd scanner with wires and pulleys. [B]: 1st scanner [C]: 2nd scanner [D]: Scanner HP sensor. Stops and reverses the scanner motor when the scanner reaches the home position. The machine measures distance from home position by counting scanner motor pulses.
PAGE 751
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER [A] [B] [C] [A]: Scanner cooling fan (front) [B]: Scanner cooling fan (rear) [C]: Scanner exhaust fan Condensation on the mirrors can cause: • Running, smearing and image borders • Printing completely black or gray pages Fans • The scanner cooling fans (front, rear) pull cool air into the scanner unit. • The scanner exhaust fan expels hot air from the scanner unit 6-35 Detailed Descriptions B132D104.
PAGE 752
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5.5 DUST DETECTION Overview When an original is put on the original feed table of the ARDF, the ARDF exposure glass is checked for dust. The dust check is done before the first original is scanned. This is done only once at the beginning of a job. The check is not done for originals added during a long scanning job. The ARDF transport belt turns with no paper fed across the ARDF scanning glass. The surface (white) of the ARDF transport belt is scanned.
PAGE 753
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT What Happens if Dust is Detected? If dust is detected, the position where the scanner stops below the ARDF exposure glass to scan the original is moved by 0.7 mm. The scanning position can be shifted two times in 0.7 mm increments, towards the scanning reference point at the upper left corner of the exposure glass. Scale Exposure Glass 0.7 mm a 0.7 mm b c 34 mm B132D975.
PAGE 754
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 How is the Dust Detected? To detect dust on the ARDF exposure glass, the ARDF transport belt turns and the CCD scans this belt. The ARDF transport belt has four grooves cut across it in the main scan direction. These grooves are recessed. Because of this, they are not easily contaminated with dust, and they are used as reference points during dust detection. Another part of the belt could have dust on it, and give an incorrect reference.
PAGE 755
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection The settings of some SP codes control how dust detection is done. • SP4020 001. Switches the dust warning on and off (default: off). When this SP is on, a warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ARDF exposure glass or the white plate above the exposure glass. Always clean the ARDF exposure glass and white plate before turning this SP on. • SP4020 002. Adjusts the sensitivity of the check.
PAGE 756
IMAGE PROCESSING August, 2006 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING 6.6.1 OVERVIEW : ASIC Chips SBU CCD Lamp, M otor, Sensor VSBCNT Analog Scanner Control AD Conversion LVDS drv. ARDF Operation Panel IPU (BICU) XDF_FGATE LVDS rsv.
PAGE 757
August, 2006 IMAGE PROCESSING 6.6.
PAGE 758
IMAGE PROCESSING August, 2006 6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT) The IPU does the following: • Controls the scanner • Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the controller memory • Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller memory, processes them, then outputs them to the VGAVD.
PAGE 759
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7 LASER UNIT 6.7.1 OVERVIEW 4 5 C Y 3 7 6 8 Y 9 K 10 11 M M C K 12 2 13 1 14 15 Y 18 C Y M C K M K 16 17 B132D002.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. LSDB (M Rear) 11. LSDB (K Rear) 12. Dual-Layer fθ Lens (M, K) 13. WTL Lens (M) 14. WTL Lens (K) 15. LSDB (K Front) 16. LSDB (M Front) 17. LSDB (C Rear) 18.
PAGE 760
LASER UNIT August, 2006 6.7.2 LD UNIT There is an LD unit for each color, and each LD unit uses a two-beam system. A photo diode (PD) in each LD unit detects the light emitted from the LD unit. The output of the PD is fed back to the LD control board. The LD control board uses this information to control the amount of light to make sure that it remains at the correct level. Dual Beam Writing In each LD unit, two beams move across the drum in the main scan direction.
PAGE 761
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS 2 1 3 4 5 7 6 M C Y K 8 11 10 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. WTL Lens (Y) WTL Lens (C) Dual-layer fθ Lens (C, Y) Polygon Motor Dual-layer fθ Lens (M, K) WTL Lens (M) 7. WTL Lens (K) 8. Dust-shield Glass 9. Dust-shield Glass 10. Dust-shield Glass 11. Dust-shield Glass 6-45 Detailed Descriptions B132D001.
PAGE 762
LASER UNIT August, 2006 Optical Path All four latent images (C, M, Y, K) are written at approximately the same time. The laser diode turn-on times for each color are timed with drum rotation and paper feed. Refer to the illustration on the previous page.
PAGE 763
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC) What does MUSIC do? MUSIC is the Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction. Three MUSIC sensors above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns made by the machine on the ITB. The machine uses the results to adjust: • The machine adjusts the start timing for the laser at the start of the main scan. This adjusts the main scan.
PAGE 764
LASER UNIT August, 2006 Location of the MUSIC Sensors [B] [A] B132D301.WMF The sensors [A] are below the ITB. A roller [B] opposite the sensors pushes the transfer belt against the sensors. This makes sure that the sensors read the patterns accurately.
PAGE 765
August, 2006 LASER UNIT How is MUSIC Done? [A] [A]: Rear MUSIC sensor [B]: Center MUSIC sensor [C]: Front MUSIC sensor [D]: Main scan MUSIC patterns [E]: Sub scan MUSIC patterns The MUSIC sensors [A], [B], and [C] read the MUSIC patterns from the ITB. [B] [C] M [D] C Y The main scan MUSIC sensor pattern [D] consists of patches for each color (M, C, Y) beside the black (K) color patch. The sub scan MUSIC sensor pattern [E] consists of patches for each color (M, C, Y) above a black (K) patch.
PAGE 766
LASER UNIT August, 2006 Vertical Position in the Test Pattern Target Actual Sensor Output B132D970A.WMF This diagram shows a close-up view of the sub-scan test pattern. K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are adjusted with reference to the K pattern. The CMY patterns are at constant intervals, but the K pattern overlaps the CMY patterns as shown. The MUSIC sensor response is measured.
PAGE 767
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 3rd Mirror Position Adjustment [2] [5] [3] [1] [4] B132D003.WMF Each color Yellow [1], Cyan [2], Magenta [3] has a mirror. The machine uses the mirror motors ( ) to adjust the position of each mirror to correct color registration errors on the ITB in the main scan direction. Color registration errors occur if all four color-toner images do not cover each other exactly on the ITB. The 3rd mirror for black (K) does not have an adjustment motor.
PAGE 768
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) 6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU 4 5 6 7 1 9 8 3 2 Y M C K 10 B132D001.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Laser Unit Development Unit (Y) Drum (Y) Development Unit (C) Drum (C) 6. Development Unit (M) 7. Drum (M) 8. Development Unit (K) 9. Drum (K) 10. ITB Four PCUs (Y, C, M, K) are arranged in tandem. There is one PCU for each color. The image that is developed on the drum transfers to the ITB (10).
PAGE 769
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) 6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM 4 3 2 5 6 7 1 8 9 10 14 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 12 Developer Cartridge Development Roller Potential Sensor Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Charge Roller Cleaning Blade Lubricant Bar B132D977.WMF 8. Lubricant Brush Roller 9. Cleaning Brush Roller 10. Waste Toner Collection Coil 11. Quenching Lamp (QL) 12. Drum 13. TD Sensor 14. Developer Augers Drum dimensions: φ60 mm Drum drive: Drum motor.
PAGE 770
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Drum Drive [A] [B] [C] B132D204.WMF [A]: Drum motor [B]: Drum motor coupling [C]: Drum shaft Each PCU (Y, C, M, K) has an independent drum motor. The drum motor [A] rotates the drum motor coupling [B] and drum motor shaft [C]. • During black-and-white copying and printing, only the black drum (K) rotates. The other color drums (Y, M, C) do not rotate.
PAGE 771
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Drum Charge [C] [B] [A] B132D204.WMF The charge roller cleaning roller [C] touches the charge roller and cleans it. • A gear on the rear of the drum shaft turns the charge roller in the opposite direction of the drum. • The gap between drum and charge roller is 0.05 mm. • The charge roller is the same length as the drum to ensure an even charge along the entire length of the drum. • The charge roller receives its charge from the charge roller power pack.
PAGE 772
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Drum Cleaning [C] [E] [D] [F] [A] [B] B132D203.WMF Each drum unit has a cleaning brush roller [A] and a cleaning blade [F] to remove toner from the drum after image transfer.
PAGE 773
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Drum Ventilation [F] [C] [E] [A] [D] [B] [G] B132D214.WMF A Peltier unit [A] on the right side of the copier dries air before it is sent through a common duct [B] to the PCUs. This prevents condensation around the drums. The Peltier cooling fan [E] pulls air into the machine. The air passes through the cold side where the moisture condenses and drains into a small reservoir [F]. The four PCU fan motors , , , (Y, M, C, K).
PAGE 774
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 The temperature/humidity sensor at the black PCU detects the relative humidity inside the machine. When the relative humidity stays at 60% for 10 minutes: 1) The Peltier unit turns ON. 2) The Peltier circulation fan and PCU fans turn on together and run at halfspeed. 3) The Peltier cooling fan turns on and runs at full speed. The operation changes when the relative humidity goes below 50% for 5 minutes: 1) The Peltier unit turns OFF.
PAGE 775
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Ozone Ventilation [B] [A] B132D962.WMF Detailed Descriptions The ozone fan [A] pulls air from around the drums through the ozone filter [B] and then expels the filtered air from the machine.
PAGE 776
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT Overview [A] [B] [C] [D] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: B132D211.
PAGE 777
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Development Unit Operation [D] [A] [C] [E] [B] [A]: Developer Cartridge [B]: Developer Augers [C]: Development Roller [D]: Doctor Blade [E]: Development Bias Terminal Each PCU is supplied by a separate developer cartridge [A] (Y, C, M, K). When a new developer cartridge is installed and the tape is removed, all the developer falls into the development unit, across the full width of the development unit.
PAGE 778
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Development, PCU Drive [A] [B] [E] [F] [C] [D] B132D213.WMF [A]: PCU Motor A motor and timing belt behind each PCU drives all the rollers in the PCU. (The drum is driven by the drum motor.
PAGE 779
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY 6.9 TONER SUPPLY 6.9.1 OVERVIEW Each PCU has a toner supply unit. 4 3 1 2 5 6 7 B132D906.BMP 5. Sub Hopper 6. Toner Supply Clutch 7.
PAGE 780
TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 1. Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) Four toner cartridges are set in the toner hopper. They are inserted left to right in this order Y, C, M and K. 2. Flexible Tubing A flexible tube connects the toner cartridge to the toner pump. 3. Toner Pump Consists of a rotor mounted on a drive shaft that creates a vacuum between itself and the toner cartridge. The rotor is idle until it is engaged by the toner pump clutch. 4.
PAGE 781
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY 6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM [C] [E] [A] [J] [F] [B] [D] [I] B132D216.WMF [G] [K] [H] B132D217.WMF The toner pump [A] pulls toner into the sub hopper [B] from the toner cartridge [C], through the flexible tube [D]. The toner hopper motor controls the mechanism, through the toner pump clutch [E]. The toner pump supplies toner to the sub hopper.
PAGE 782
TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE [C] [D] [B] [A] B132D219.WMF Collapsible Sides [A]: Shutter pin [B]: Toner supply port plug [C]: Toner supply port [D]: ID chip Each toner cartridge is installed in a bin of the toner hopper. B132D218.WMF When the bin door is closed, a shutter pin [A] forces open a plug [B]. This opens the toner supply port [C] and toner can flow from the cartridge.
PAGE 783
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY [A] B132I108A.WMF A toner cartridge (STC) must be set with its color ID label [A] facing out. Important • At elevations 1,000 meters (3,280 ft.) above sea level, the toner cartridge packs may expand due to the difference in air pressure, preventing them from being installed in their bins. • After approximately 24 hours, the cartridges should shrink to normal size.
PAGE 784
TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS [D] [C] [B] [A] B132D217A.WMF The toner end sensors are below the sub hoppers for each color [A]: K (Black) [B]: M (Magenta) [C]: C (Cyan) [D]: Y (Yellow) The toner end sensor monitors the amount of toner in the sub hopper and issues the near-end alert when toner runs low in the sub hopper.
PAGE 785
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY Toner end After a toner near-end alert is output, the number of pages that can be printed until toner end is determined by the amount of toner that remains in the sub hopper. After the toner near-end alert has been issued, the toner end alert is issued by one of two counters, whichever goes over the limit first: • Page count. After the near-end alert, the number of pages that can be printed is based on page count regardless of coverage.
PAGE 786
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION 6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH [B] [A] [C] [D] [E] [F] B132D215.
PAGE 787
WASTE TONER COLLECTION [A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils Six waste toner collection coils (1 for each PCU and 1 each for the ITB and transfer roller) transport waste toner away from these components after cleaning. The PCU motors drive coils to . The PTR motor drives coils and .
PAGE 788
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS [D] [A] [C] [B] [E] B132D220.WMF [A]: Waste Toner Transport Motor Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil [C] and the vertical waste toner transport coil [D]. [B]: Waste Toner Distribution Motor Drives the waste toner bottle distribution coil [E]. This motor does not constantly turn.
PAGE 789
August, 2006 WASTE TONER COLLECTION 6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS [A] [C] [B] Three sensors in the waste toner monitor the operation of waste toner collection and trigger an alert on the operation panel or issue an SC code. [A]: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor [B]: Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor [C]: Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor This sensor [A] detects the position of the waste toner bottle, and checks if it is set correctly.
PAGE 790
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor When the level of the waste toner rises high enough: • The pressure of the top of the stack of waste toner pushes a piece of silicone rubber, then the film pushes a feeler into the gap of the sensor [B]. • The blocked sensor signals the machine that the waste toner bottle is nearly full. • The machine issues a near-full alert and switches off the waste toner distribution motor.
PAGE 791
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11.1 OVERVIEW In this machine, there are two processes. • Potential control. Adjusts the image creation process (charge, development bias, and LD power) to achieve the target toner coverage. During potential control several series of patterns are created at prescribed times. The potential sensor and ID sensor read these patterns.
PAGE 792
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL Potential Sensor Copier PCU Potential Sensor Probe Charge Roller Drawer Connector Potential Sensor PP Max. Output: -1000V Drum Surface Potential -900V (Max.) Development Roller Range: -350 to -800 V DC def. = -500V Transfer Roller 1.5 kV (Normal Use) 5 kV (Transfer) B132D901.WMF There is a potential sensor in each PCU above the surface of the drum. Each potential sensor consists of a probe and small power pack.
PAGE 793
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL ID Sensors Rear ITB (Image Transfer Belt) K 40 mm 40 mm Y C M Front 150 mm B132D902.WMF B132D903.BMP B132D904.BMP Black ID Sensor Color ID Sensor The black ID sensor is a direct reflection sensor. The color ID sensor is a combination of a direct reflection sensor and a diffused reflection sensor. This combination of a direct reflection sensor pair and an additional diffused reflection sensor achieves more accurate readings for Y, M, C colors.
PAGE 794
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 During process control, the creation of the patterns is timed so the Magenta, Cyan and Yellow patterns are transferred to the ITB at approximately the same time. The color ID sensor then reads the color ID sensor patterns in the order M, C, Y. Note that the K pattern is read by the black ID sensor at approximately the same time the Cyan pattern is being read.
PAGE 795
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL TD Sensor [A] B132D905.BMP There is a TD sensor [A] below the development unit of each PCU. The TD sensor directly measures the amount of toner in the developer/toner mixture. Unlike previous machines, this TD sensor is not in direct contact with the developer/toner mixture. Vt is the output voltage of the TD sensor. When Vt goes high, toner is added to the developer to bring Vt back to the Vtref value.
PAGE 796
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 List of Process Control Acronyms The potential control phase of process control involves many adjustments. Here is list of acronyms used in the descriptions of process control adjustments. Acronym Cdc Vb Vb 1 Vd Vd 1 Vdhome Vdp Vk Vl Vpl Vpl 1 Vpp Vr Vsg_dif Vsg Vsg_reg Vsp Vt Vtcnt Vtref 1 Description Charge DC bias Development charge bias Development charge bias after Vr (residual potential) adjustment Drum potential after the drum is charged by the charge roller.
PAGE 797
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Important SP Codes Related to Process Control This table lists the SP codes that are associated with the most important elements of process control. For more, please refer to Section "5. Service Tables". SP3501 001 Potential Control Type Selection 0: Auto 1: Fixed Exposure PM (LD power) Development Development bias Range Target Effect in Process Control Cdc Vpp SP3576 SP3577 SP2201 SP2202 –700 V 2.2 kV –450 to –950 V 1.8 to 2.4 kV, 2.
PAGE 798
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL When is Potential Control Done? 1. Initial process control self-check. The process control self-check is done automatically after the machine is turned on, if the pressure roller thermistor detects that the fusing temperature is below 100°C (adjust this temp with SP3554 001). NOTE: The initial process control self-check is not done when the machine is turned on with the front door open. 2.
PAGE 799
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL What is Done During Potential Control? Potential Control Process Flow Detect VdHome Adjust AC Charge (Charge Roller) Pre-Processing Sensor Check Relating SC Codes 1 SC436 to 439: Potential Sensor Error :vd 2 SC316 to 319: AC Bias Charge Adjustment Error SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error Agitate Developer 3 SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error SC400: ID Sensor Error 1: Calibration SC418: LED Error during Vsg Adjustment AdjustVsg Vsg Adjust Create 1
PAGE 800
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 First, a check confirms that all the PCU are set correctly. NOTE: Please keep in mind that all the readings and calculations described below are done in each of the four PCUs. For simplicity, however, the discussions are limited to what occurs in a single PCU. Detect Vdhome A charge of –700V is applied to the drum. The potential sensor detects the potential of the drum and checks if the potential sensor, drum, and charge roller are functioning normally.
PAGE 801
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Calculate Development Gamma The laser diodes write a 10-grade potential sensor pattern on each drum. To make the different densities, the machine changes the PWM duty of the laser diodes. B132D925.WMF At this step, the development gamma (development capacity) is measured. The necessary potentials are calculated.
PAGE 802
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 Adjust Vpl The LD power is adjusted in order to get to the target Vpl (the Vpl value after correction for Vr) After correction for Vr, the value of Vpl must be within ±5V. Vpl (LD Power) Adjust Errors SC Codes SC424~SC427 SP3821 Procon OK? 64 For More Details: See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in Section "4. Troubleshooting".
PAGE 803
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL Overview The toner supply method can be selected with SP3301 001-004. • 0: Fixed supply mode (used for testing only; do not use this mode except during some troubleshooting procedures as described in section 4) • 1: PID (Proportional Integral Differentiation) control mode (default) This section describes only PID control because only PID control is used in the field. PID control uses inputs from pixel count, and from the TD and ID sensors.
PAGE 804
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 2. Page interval process control (Vsp detection between pages) This function operates only when SP3042 001 (Vtref correction) is set to "ON" (default). The Vsp ID sensor pattern is created between the page images on the ITB (Default: Every 10 pages). This interval can be adjusted with SP3171. Rear K Y Image Area Image Area Image Area [A] [B] M C Front Belt Rotation B132D919.WMF [A]: ID Sensor – K [B]: ID Sensor – Y, C, M See Section 6.12.
PAGE 805
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Toner Supply Operation Flow Page Interval Process Control (SP3042 001 Vtref Calibration Mode ON) Create ID Sensor Patterns Read ID Sensor Patterns Determine Amount of Toner Compare Reading with Threshold Range for Toner Adjustment Between Pages Toner Supply Control Method: PID Control Light Correct Dark Lower Vtref No Action Raise Vtref Start Print Job GAVD Get Pixel Count TD Sensor Reads dpi Calculate Image Coverage Get Vtref Calculate Amount of Toner Supply Amou
PAGE 806
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.1 OVERVIEW 2 3 4 1 5 15 6 14 13 12 11 B132D301.WMF 10 1. Image Transfer Rollers ( Y, C, M, K) 2. ITB 3. Transfer Power Pack 4. ITB Drive Roller 5. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller 6. Belt Pressure Roller 7. Lubricant Bar 9 8 7 8. PTR Cleaning Blade 9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil 10. PTR Cleaning Brush roller 11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) 12. ITB Bias Roller 13.
PAGE 807
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 1. Image Transfer Rollers ( Y, C, M, K) The positive charge applied by the transfer power pack to these sponge rollers (one for each PCU) pulls the developed images from the drums down onto the ITB. 2. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Receives the toner images from the four drums and holds them until they are transferred to paper. During a full-color job, all the drums (Y, C, M, K) are in contact with the ITB.
PAGE 808
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Provides pressure when the ITB and paper pass between this roller and the PTR below during image transfer from ITB to paper. 12. ITB Bias Roller The transfer power pack applies a negative charge to this roller to push the negatively-charged toner image from the ITB to the paper. 13. ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil Toner removed from the ITB by the ITB cleaning brush roller and ITB cleaning blade falls into the rotating coils.
PAGE 809
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.2 ITB DRIVE [A] [C] [B] B132D307.WMF [A]: ITB drive motor [B]: ITB drive roller [C]: ITB Detailed Descriptions The ITB drive motor [A] drives the ITB drive roller [B]. All the other rollers inside the ITB are idle rollers.
PAGE 810
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.3 ITB LIFT [A] [C] [B] [D] [F] B132D310.WMF [E] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: ITB lift motor ITB lift cam ITB lift sensor ITB Black print position Full-color print position The ITB lift motor [A] (a stepper motor) turns the ITB lift cam [B]. This cam lifts and lowers the ITB [D]. The operation of the ITB lift motor is controlled by the ITB lift sensor [C]. When the machine is turned ON, the ITB stays at position [E].
PAGE 811
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER When Black-and-White Mode is Selected: • The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes out of the ITB lift sensor. • The motor stops. • With the left side of the ITB down, only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB. • The machine automatically adjusts paper feed timing for black-and-white copying with only one drum.
PAGE 812
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK [E] [B] [A] [C] [D] [F] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: B132D309.WMF Transfer power pack Image transfer roller terminals , , , Image transfer rollers , , , ITB ITB bias roller terminal ITB bias roller To transfer the images from drum to ITB: • The transfer power pack [A] supplies a positive charge (1 kV 24 to 30 µA) to the image transfer roller terminals [B] , , , .
PAGE 813
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION [A] P.P [B] [D] [C] B132D304.WMF This machine employs a repulsive force bias system to transfer the image on the ITB to paper. The negative bias from the back side of the ITB applies a repulsive force to the toner on the ITB surface. This repulsive force pushes the toner from the ITB surface onto the paper.
PAGE 814
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.6 PTR CLEANING [B] [C] [A] [D] [F] [E] B132D303.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: PTR cleaning brush roller PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) PTR cleaning blade PTR lubricant bar PTR waste toner collection coil PTR motor The PTR cleaning brush roller [A], driven by the PTR motor [F], removes toner from the PTR [B] because these rollers rotate in opposite directions. The PTR cleaning blade [C] removes toner that remains after brush cleaning.
PAGE 815
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.7 ITB CLEANING [C] [A] [B] [D] [E] B132D306.WMF ITB cleaning brush roller ITB (Image Transfer Belt) ITB cleaning blade Brush roller cleaning roller Waste toner collection coil Detailed Descriptions [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: The PTR motor ( 6.12.6) rotates the ITB cleaning brush roller [A] against the bottom of the ITB [B] while it passes above.
PAGE 816
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL [D] August 2006 [A] [C] [B] B132D308.WMF [A]: MUSIC sensors , , ID Sensor – K , ID Sensor Y, M, C ( 6.7.4, 6.11.3) [B]: ITB position sensor 1 [C]: ITB position sensor 2 [D]: ITB encoder strip scale For full color and black-and-white printing on plain paper, and for thin paper, the ITB speed is 282 mm/s. For OHPs, and Thick Paper 1 and 2, the speed is 141 mm/s (1/2 speed).
PAGE 817
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION [A] B132D967.WMF Detailed Descriptions The image transfer fan [A] draws in cool air and blows it across the top of the drawer unit to cool the ITB.
PAGE 818
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13 PAPER FEED 9 10 8 6.13.1 OVERVIEW 11 7 12 13 1 14 2 15 16 3 4 17 18 5 19 6 B132D600A.WMF 1. Tandem Tray (Tray 1) 11. Double Feed Detection LED 2. Left Tray Paper Sensor 12. Bypass Tray 3. Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) 13. Relay Sensor 4. Universal Tray (Tray 2) 14. Lower Relay Roller 5. Paper Size Switch (Tray 3) 15. Pick Up Roller 6. Universal Tray (Tray 3) 16. Feed Roller 7. Upper Relay Roller 17. Grip Roller 8. Registration Roller 18.
PAGE 819
PAPER FEED Tray Capacities The machine has four paper trays: • Tandem Tray (Tray 1). 1550 + 1550 sheets • Universal Tray (Tray 2) 550 sheets • Universal Tray (Tray 3) 550 sheets • Bypass tray. 100 sheets. Built-in Feed Stations • Paper feed and separation. Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for paper separation and feed. Each tray has an independent stepper motor to drive its paper feed mechanisms. Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Separation Roller (FRR) • Tray lift motors.
PAGE 820
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.2 DRIVE [A] [G] [F] [E] [C] [B] [D] [H] B132D923.WMF An independent paper feed motor [A] drives the rollers in each tray. The motor also drives grip rollers [B], which pull the paper out of the tray. This mechanism is identical for each tray. A vertical transport sensor [C] at each feed station detects paper jams. The paper feed motors of each tray drive the vertical transport rollers, opposite to each feed station (not shown).
PAGE 821
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM – TRAY 2,3 Bottom Plate Lift [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] B132D610.WMF Tray lift operates in this order: [A]: Tray lift motor switches on [B]: Coupling rotates [C]: Pin locks coupling at shaft [D]: Shaft rotates [E]: Lift arm raised by the rotation of the shaft [F]: Bottom plate pushed up by lift arm NOTE: The universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) each have a paper near end sensor inside the lift motor assembly.
PAGE 822
PAPER FEED August 2006 Lift Sensor [A] [C] [E] [D] [B] B132D934.WMF [I] [F] [H] [G] B132D935.WMF Tray lift motor Æ on, pick-up solenoid [A] Æ on, pick-up roller [B] lowers. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, actuator [C] on the pick-up roller support [D] activates the tray lift sensor [E], and the lift motor stops. After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor deactivates.
PAGE 823
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present [B] [A] [D] [C] While waiting for the first sheet to feed and between sheets, the feed roller [A] must not rotate. However, the grip roller [B] must turn, so that any paper coming up the vertical transport path can continue to feed. To do this, the paper feed motor [C] rotates in reverse. The feed roller cannot turn because of a one-way clutch.
PAGE 824
PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Feed and Separation [I] [C] [G] [H] [A] [D] [E] [F] [B] B132D937.WMFF If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] stays off and the separation roller [B] can turn freely.
PAGE 825
August 2006 PAPER FEED Separation Roller Release Mechanism [B] [D] [A] [C] B132D938.WMF B132D939.WMF This mechanism has advantages: • When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation roller rotates. If the separation roller is away from the feed roller, it reduces the load on the paper feed motor and drive mechanism, and it also reduces wear to the rubber surface of the separation roller caused by friction between the separation roller and the feed roller.
PAGE 826
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END – TRAYS 2 AND 3 [A] [B] B132D940.WMF The paper near end sensor [A] is in the lift motor assembly. It can detect four levels of remaining paper. The paper end sensor [A] receives light reflected from the paper below [B] until the last sheet has been fed. Then, paper end is detected.
PAGE 827
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION Tandem Tray (Tray 1) The tandem tray does not have paper size switches. Every time the paper size is changed by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the selected paper size with SP5959-001. Universal Trays (Tray 2, 3) [B] [A] [C] B132D616.WMF The paper size switch [A] detects the paper size with 5 microswitches.
PAGE 828
PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Size Switch Output Paper 12" x 18" SEF A3 SEF B4 SEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF DLT LG SEF LT SEF LT LEF HLT SEF HLT LEF F4 Folio F Executive LEF Executive SEF 8-Kai 16-Kai LEF 16-Kai SEF Size 12" x 18" 297 x 420 mm 257 x 394 mm 210 x 297 mm 210 x 297 mm 182 x 257 mm 182 x 257 mm 148 x 210 mm 148 x 210 mm 11" x 17" 8½" x 14" 8½" x 11" 8½" x 11" 5½" x 8½ " 5½" x 8½ " 8½" x 13" 8¼" x 13" 8" x 13" 7¼" x 10 ½" 7¼" x 10 ½" 267 x 390 mm 267 x 195 mm 195 x 267 mm Swi
PAGE 829
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS [A] [B] B132D608A.WMF This tray heater turns on automatically: • When the main power switch is turned off • When the machine enters auto off mode NOTE: These tray heaters are not connected before the machine is shipped from the factory. The heaters are installed in the machine but their connection is optional. If the trays are needed, you must connect them at machine installation or at any time after installation. For more see Section "1. Installation".
PAGE 830
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY – TRAY 1 Overview [B] [A] B132D942.WMF The left tray [A] and right tray [B] each hold 1,550 sheets. Paper feeds from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, paper in the left tray is automatically pushed into the right tray and paper feed resumes. Normally, both the right and the left trays are joined together.
PAGE 831
August 2006 PAPER FEED Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray [A] [B] [C] B132D944.WMF B132D943.WMF [A] [D] When there is paper in the left tray, lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B] in the right tray. During copying if there is no paper in the left tray: • Right tray lock solenoid [C] turns on, which releases lock lever [A]. • The left tray can be pulled out to load paper, even while paper is feeding from the right tray.
PAGE 832
PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection The machine detects when the tray 1 has been placed in the machine by monitoring the tray set signal through the connector. 6 6 2 3 7 4 9 1 5 8 B132D946.WMF When the machine detects that the tray is in the machine, the right tray paper sensor [1] (under the tray) checks immediately whether there is paper in the right tandem tray. NOTE: This immediate detection saves time.
PAGE 833
August 2006 PAPER FEED 1 3 5 7 8 10 4 2 9 6 Paper remaining: The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by which combination of the three paper height sensors [1] , , are actuated by the actuator on the left rail as the bottom plate rises. • With the actuator below paper height sensor (the bottom sensor), no sensor is actuated and the display indicates the tray is full. • When the actuator passes paper height sensor , the display indicates 50% of the paper supply remaining.
PAGE 834
PAPER FEED August 2006 Fence Drive [D] [A] [C] [A] [C] [D] [B] [B] B132D948.WMF The side fences [A] of the right tray open only when paper in the left tray goes to the right tray. The side fence solenoids [B] turn on and open the side fences. The side fences move out until the open sensors [C] activate. After the stack has been moved into the right tray: The side fence solenoids turn off and the side fences close. The side fences move in until the close sensors [D] activate.
PAGE 835
August 2006 PAPER FEED Rear Fence Drive [E] [C] [D] [A] [B] B132D950.
PAGE 836
PAPER FEED August 2006 Tray Side-to-side Positioning [A] [B] B132D952.WMF B132D951.WMF When the feed tray is set in the feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate [A] presses the feed tray against the stopper [B]. By moving the positioning plate, the tray position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
PAGE 837
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3 [B] [A] B132D953.WMF Detailed Descriptions When the tray is placed in the feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the lock plate [B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.
PAGE 838
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.10 BYPASS TRAY Bypass Feed and Separation [B] [A] [E] [D] [C] [F] B132D954.WMF B132D603.WMF The bypass tray [A] opens from the right side of the machine. Bypass Tray Operation Sequence: Bypass feed motor [B]Æ Bypass feed clutch [C]Æ Pick-up roller [D] Æ Pick-up solenoid (see the next page)Æ Feed roller [E] and separation roller [F] The bypass tray uses the standard FRR feed system.
PAGE 839
August 2006 PAPER FEED Bypass Tray Paper End Detection [B] [A] [C] B132D604.WMF When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cutout in the bypass paper end sensor [B].
PAGE 840
PAPER FEED August 2006 Bypass Paper Size Detection [B] [C] [D] [A] B132D602.WMF Paper Width When the front fence [A] and rear fence [B] are moved to the sides of the paper in the bypass tray: • The metal actuator [C] moves to a position on the sensor strip [D]. • The machine reads the position of the actuator on the strip to determine the paper size. Paper Length Paper length is determined with pulse counts read from the registration sensor.
PAGE 841
August 2006 PAPER FEED The operator can specify non-standard paper sizes for feeding from the bypass tray. The size must be within the range shown in the illustration. 148~457 mm (5.8" ~ 17.9") 100 ~ 305 mm (3.9" ~ 12") B132D955.WMF Detailed Descriptions NOTE: • Use SP1905 to adjust the bypass feed clutch operation if thick paper often jams at the registration roller. For more, see “5. Service Tables”. • Use SP5150 to enable paper length up to 600 mm (23.6").
PAGE 842
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION Overview [A] [B] [G] [E] [D] [C] [F] B132D941.WMF The registration rollers [A] and registration sensor [B] handle paper fed from six sources: [C]: Tandem tray and two universal trays [D]: Duplex unit [E]: Bypass tray The bypass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers. The grip rollers [F] feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the registration rollers.
PAGE 843
August 2006 PAPER FEED Paper Registration Drive [B] [A] [C] B132D607.WMF The registration motor [A] stops when the registration sensor [B] detects the paper at the registration rollers [C]. Because the paper is still feeding, the paper buckles against the registration rollers and corrects skew. NOTE: Use SP1003 to adjust the registration motor timing for each paper feed station or the duplex tray. For details see “5. Service Tables”.
PAGE 844
PAPER FEED August 2006 Jam Removal at Paper Registration [F] [C] [E] [D] [G] [G] [F] [B] [A] B132D617.WMF If a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the registration rollers, the next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray. The paper in the feed path must be stopped to avoid paper jams. When a jam occurs, a guide plate falls open to divert paper into the duplex tray.
PAGE 845
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION [A] [C] [B] B132D941.WMF After skew correction at the registration rollers, a sensor pair checks the translucence of each sheet. This function makes sure that each sheet of paper fed is of the same type and also detects double-feeds. If a sheet of a different type or a double-feed is detected, the machine stops the job and a copy jam error message is shown.
PAGE 846
PAPER FEED August 2006 The amount of light received by the double-feed detection sensor is referred to a lookup table that stores the values of the translucence of paper types. • Paper type check. If the amount of light measured is within the range of translucence for the paper selected for the copy job, no action is taken. If the value is out of range, the machine stops the job. • Double-feed check. The translucence of the paper at the registration roller is compared to the reading of the previous sheet.
PAGE 847
August 2006 PAPER FEED Paper Types Paper Type (UP Mode) Paper Weight Range Translucence OHP --- HIGH Tracing Paper --- ↓ Thin Paper 14 to 19 lb Bond 2 52 to 71 g/m ↓ Normal 19 to 33 lb Bond 2 72 to 126 g/m ↓ Thick Paper 1 33 to 41 lb Bond 2 127 to 156 g/m ↓ Thick Paper 2 41 to 68 lb Bond 2 157 to 256 g/m LOW The paper type selection is reset: • When the machine is switched off and on, the paper type setting for the bypass tray is reset.
PAGE 848
FUSING, PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT 6.14.1 OVERVIEW 3 2 1 5 4 6 7 8 20 9 19 18 17 16 15 12 10 14 11 13 1. Cleaning Roller – Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller 2. Fusing Lamp (x1 –Hot Roller) 3. Thermistor (Hot Roller) 4. Thermostat (Hot Roller) 5. Fusing Belt 6. Heating Roller (φ28.5) 7. Fusing Lamps (x2 – Heating Roller) 8. Thermostat (Heating Roller) 9. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor 10. Thermostat (Pressure Roller) 11.
PAGE 849
August 2006 FUSING, PAPER EXIT Paper Type Selection (User Tools) Paper Weight Range Line Speed Thin 14 to 19 lb Bond 2 52 to 71 g/m 282 mm/s Normal 19 to 33 lb Bond 2 72 to 126 g/m 282 mm/s Thick 1 33 to 41 lb Bond 2 127 to 156 g/m 141 mm/s Thick 2 41 to 68 lb Bond 2 157 to 256 g/m 141 mm/s OHP --- 100 mm/s 6-133 Detailed Descriptions The fusing belt system applies heat to the belt at three points: the hot roller, the heating roller, and the pressure roller.
PAGE 850
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Hot Roller Thermistor Hot Roller Thermostats Heating Roller Thermostats Pressure Roller Thermistor B132D402.WMF 5. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor 6. Pressure Roller Thermostats 7. Heating Roller Thermistor Each roller in the fusing unit has one thermistor and two thermostats.
PAGE 851
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS 6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE [B] [D] [A] [C] [E] [F] Fusing/exit motor Idle roller Hot roller Fusing belt Heating roller Pressure roller The fusing/exit motor [A] drives the fusing unit. Fusing exit motor [A]> Idle Roller [B]> Hot Roller [C]> Fusing Belt [D], Heating Roller [E], Pressure Roller [F]. 6-135 Detailed Descriptions [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: B132D404.
PAGE 852
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] B132D401.WMF [F] [A]: Fusing belt lubrication roller [B]: Fusing belt [C]: Hot roller [D]: Cleaning roller – fusing belt lubrication roller [E]: Cleaning felt roller [F]: Pressure roller The fusing unit uses two lubrication rollers saturated with silicone oil to prevent toner and paper dust from clinging to the fusing belt.
PAGE 853
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS Stripper Retraction [C] [D] [A] B132D980.WMF [E] [B] The pawls of the fusing belt strippers [A] and pressure roller strippers [B] touch the surfaces of the fusing belt and pressure roller during normal operation. The strippers retract immediately under the slightest pressure [D] if an accordion jam occurs.
PAGE 854
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL Basic Temperature Control The fusing unit has four fusing lamps: one in the hot roller (350W), two in the heating roller (590W x2), and one in the pressure roller (350W). • The heating roller is the main source of heat to the fusing belt for fusing. • The hot roller provides additional heat for fusing. • The pressure roller maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the machine is in standby mode.
PAGE 855
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS Temperature Control Graph CPM Down Standby Power ON Idling Start Machine Ready Job Start Standby Job End B132D131.
PAGE 856
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 Correction for Machine Internal Temperature If the temperature inside the machine is less than 20 ºC, all target fusing temperatures are increased by 5 ºC. If the temperature inside the machine is more than 20 ºC, the standby temperature is decreased by 5 ºC. The temperature inside the machine is measured with the temperature sensor that is near the waste toner bottle. Copy Speed Reduction (CPM Down Mode) During copying, the target temperature is 175 ºC (plain paper).
PAGE 857
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS 6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION [D] [C] [B] B132D964.WMF [A]: Fusing unit [B]: Heat sink [C]: Fusing cooling fan [D]: Fusing exhaust fan Heat rising from the fusing unit [A] collects around a heat sink [B]. The heat sink contains pipes with water that help to cool the hot air. The fusing cooling fan [C] pulls cool air into the machine and blows it over the heat sink.
PAGE 858
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.1 OVERVIEW 3 2 1 4 5 13 12 11 10 9 8 B132D501.WMF 7 6 1. Relay Sensor 8. Duplex Transport Sensor 2 2. Inverter Entrance Roller 9. Duplex Transport Roller 1 3. Reverse Trigger Roller 10. Duplex Transport Sensor 1 4. Jogger Fences 11. Duplex Inverter Sensor 5. Duplex Transport Sensor 3 12. Inverter Exit Roller 6. Duplex Transport Rollers 3, 4 13. Duplex Junction Gate 7.
PAGE 859
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT [1] 6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE [7] [2] [3] [9] [4] [10] [6] [5] B132D505.WMF [11] [5] [9] B132D956.
PAGE 860
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION [B] [C] B132D506.WMF [A] B132D507.WMF [D] [E] Inverter Feed-in and Jogging Just after the main switch is turned on: • Duplex jogger motor [A] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [B] to home position (determined by the duplex jogger HP sensor [C]). When the Start key is pressed: • Motor [A] positions fences [B] 12 mm away from the selected paper size to wait for the paper.
PAGE 861
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Inverter Feed-out [A] [B] B132D957.WMF [C] [F] [D] B132D508.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: [F] Detailed Descriptions [E] Reverse trigger roller solenoid Reverse trigger roller Reverse roller Paper Inverter exit roller Relay sensor After jogging, each page is fed back as follows: • Solenoid [A] pushes down roller [B]. • Roller [B] contacts roller [C], catching the paper between the two rollers.
PAGE 862
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED [A] [B] [C] [D] B132D958.WMF [A]: Junction gate solenoid [B]: Duplex junction gate [C]: Transport rollers 1, 2, 3, 4 [D]: Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3 After inversion: • If duplex mode is not selected, the duplex junction gate solenoid [A] does not switch on to open the duplex junction gate [B]. The paper goes to the output tray or finisher face down.
PAGE 863
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED The number of sheets that can be processed at a time depends on the size of the paper. The table below shows the order of page processing for a 14-page job. Odd numbers are the front sides of the pages, even numbers are the back sides.
PAGE 864
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 4. 1st sheet, back page printed (pg. 2) B132D961.WMF 5. 4th sheet feeds, front page printed (pg.7) 6. 1st sheet exits (pg. 1 and 2) 7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex tray. 8. 2nd sheet, back page printed (pg. 4) 9. 5th sheet feeds. B132D963.WMF 10. 2nd sheet exits. 11. 5th sheet, back page printed (pg. 9), feeds to duplex tray. 12. 3rd sheet, back page printed (pg. 6) 13. 6th sheet, front page printed (pg. 11) 14. 4th sheet, back page, (pg. 8), 7th sheet front page (pg.
PAGE 865
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION [C] [A] [B] [A]: Duplex Fan [B]: Rear Duplex Fan [C]: Front Duplex Fan The duplex fan [A] draws cool air into the duplex unit. The rear duplex fan [B] and front duplex fan [C] expel the heated air through vents on the left side of the machine. 6-149 Detailed Descriptions B132D965.
PAGE 866
PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.17 PAPER EXIT 6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM [C] [B] [A] B132D504.
PAGE 867
August 2006 PAPER EXIT 6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM [A] [D] [C] [A] [B] [A]: Heat Pipe Roller [B]: Exit Rollers [C]: Heat Pipe Roller Fins [D]: Cooling Pipe Fan Immediately after paper leaves the fusing unit, it passes between the heat pipe roller [A] and the exit rollers [B]. The heat pipe roller absorbs heat from the paper. Fins [C] attached to the front end of the heat pipe roller conduct heat away from the heat pipe roller.
PAGE 868
PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING [A] B132D966.WMF The paper exit fan [A] draws hot air from the paper exit area and expels it through a vent on the left side of the machine.
PAGE 869
August 2006 PAPER EXIT 6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES Operation Sw. Off -orAuto Off Timer (1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.) Stand-by Mode Energy Saver Key ON -orPanel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s) Key Operation Operation Sw. Off -orAuto Off Timer (1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.) Operation Sw. Off -orAuto Off Timer (1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.) Panel-Off Mode Return Time Less Than 10s Energy Saver Timer (1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.
PAGE 870
PAPER EXIT August 2006 These modes are controlled by the following user tools. • Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Panel Off Timer (default 60 seconds). Maximum recovery time: 10 seconds • Low power mode timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Energy Saver Timer (default 15 minutes). Maximum recovery time: 4 minutes • Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Auto Off Timer (default 90 minutes).
PAGE 871
A3/11”x17” PAPER SIZE TRAY (Machine Code: B331) 06/09
PAGE 872
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTRALLATION ................................................................. B331-1 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B331-2 2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT................................... B331-2 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS................................................. B331-4 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..............................................................
PAGE 873
PAGE 874
September 2006 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT 1. INSTALLATION Peripherals For details about installing the A3/DLT Kit B331, please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service manual.
PAGE 875
BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT September 2006 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. The procedure for the two wires is the same. [F] [C] [E] [D] [B] [A] [C] [A] [B] B331R102.WMF 1. Remove the tray. 2. Remove the inner cover (2 screws). 3. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [A] (2 stoppers [B]). 4. Remove the wire cover [C] (1 E-ring each).
PAGE 876
September 2006 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT [E] [D] [B] [A] [C] B331R061.WMF Peripherals NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire: 1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B] and set the projection [C] in the hole [D]. 2) Position the wire as shown [E]. 3) Do not cross the wires.
PAGE 877
SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION September 2006 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION [C] [B] [D] [A] B331D201.WMF This tray mechanism is basically same as the tandem LCT. This tray bottom plate [A] is lifted through the tray wires [B] by the lift motor [C] rotation. There is no remaining paper capacity detection. The paper remaining sensors [D] trigger messages on the LCD to let the user know how much paper remains in the tray.
PAGE 878
LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) (Machine Code: B473) 06/09
PAGE 879
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B473-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... B473-1 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... B473-2 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID.......................................................................... B473-3 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES ....................... B473-4 1.5 TRAY MOTOR...............................................
PAGE 880
PAGE 881
September 2006 EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS [C] [B] [D] [A] [F] [E] B473R001.
PAGE 882
PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS September 2006 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS [B] [A] [D] B473R002.WMF [E] [C] B473R003.
PAGE 883
September 2006 PICK-UP SOLENOID 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID [A] B473R004.WMF Rear cover ( x4) Open the transport cover ( 1.2) Peripherals Bracket cover ( 2.
PAGE 884
PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES September 2006 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES [A] B473R005.WMF [B] B473R006.WMF Open the top cover. Right cover ( 1.
PAGE 885
September 2006 TRAY MOTOR 1.5 TRAY MOTOR [A] B473R007.WMF Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]: Tray motor ( x2, x1) Peripherals 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR [A] [B] B473R008.
PAGE 886
PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT September 2006 1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT [B] [A] [C] B473R109.WMF The side fences [A] can be adjusted for A4 Sideways, B5 Sideways, or LT sideways at the top [B] and bottom brackets [C]. After changing the side fences to accept another paper size, you must execute SP5959 005 (Paper Type – Tray 4) and select the paper size of the side fence positions. For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service Tables” of the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c service manual.
PAGE 887
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS 5 6 7 4 3 8 2 1 17 9 16 10 15 11 14 12 B473D001.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Paper Height Sensor 2 11. Paper Tray 12. Paper Height Sensor 3 13. Paper Tray Motor 14. Low Limit Sensor 15. Tray Drive Belt 16. Feed Motor 17.
PAGE 888
OVERVIEW September 2006 Pick-up, Separation, Feed. Non-contact, maintenance free FRR sysem. ( Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR)) Tray Lift. Tray lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray. Paper Size Detection. The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers. The paper size must be entered with SP5959 005. For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service Tables.” Paper Height Detection. A feeler and four photointerrupters are used. Paper End Detection.
PAGE 889
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT 5 4 3 2 1 6 8 7 B473D003.WMF 2. Separation Roller 3. Transport Rollers 4. Feed Roller 5. Feed Motor 6. Tray Motor 7. Tray Lift Shaft 8. Tray Drive Belt B473-9 06/09 Peripherals 1.
PAGE 890
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION September 2006 2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION A standard FRR system is used. It consists of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers. 2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED [B] [A] [C] B473D004.WMF The feed motor [A] drives the transport rollers [B]. The separation roller [C], which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow, remains at rest.
PAGE 891
September 2006 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION 2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION [C] [B] [A] [E] [D] B473D005.WMF The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]. The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack. The separation roller [E], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of the tray.
PAGE 892
PAPER LIFT September 2006 2.3 PAPER LIFT [E] [A] [D] [F] [B] [C] [H] B473D006.WMF [G] B473D158.WMF Tray motor [A] Î Gear [B] Î Shaft [C] Î Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper tray [E]. After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops. When the paper height sensor activates, the tray motor lifts the tray.
PAGE 893
September 2006 PAPER LIFT [C] [D] [A] [B] [E] B473D108.WMF The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the tray motor. • This mechanism lowers the tray by 5 cm, which gives the user enough space to add 500 sheets of paper. • If the down switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down once again by 5 cm. This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient amounts and at the same position.
PAGE 894
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION September 2006 2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION [A] [F] [B] [E] [D] [C] B473D006.WMF As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the paper near end sensor [F].
PAGE 895
September 2006 PAPER END DETECTION 2.5 PAPER END DETECTION [A] [B] B473D111.WMF The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack. Peripherals When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals paper end.
PAGE 896
PAPER END DETECTION September 2006 B473-16 06/09
PAGE 897
2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER Peripherals (Machine Code: B700/B701)
PAGE 898
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B700-1 Peripherals 1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES....................................................................... B700-1 1.1.1 COVERS.................................................................................... B700-1 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ..................................................... B700-2 1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ................................ B700-4 1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER.............
PAGE 899
2. DETAILS............................................................................. B700-24 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B700-24 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................... B700-26 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 ....................................................... B700-26 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 ...................................................... B700-27 2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 ....................
PAGE 900
What This Manual Contains This manual describes two finishers, the 2000-Sheet Finisher Booklet (B700) and 3000-Sheet Finisher (B701): • Replacement and Adjustment • Details For details about installation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and specifications please refer to the Service Manual for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c. 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 This finisher is equipped with three trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher, an upper (shift) tray, and a lower tray for booklets.
PAGE 901
PAGE 902
August 2006 BASIC PROCEDURES 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the guide [A] indicated in the figure. [A] 1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES 1.1.1 COVERS B700I209.MWF [H] [A] [B] [C] [D] [G] [E] B700R101.WMF [A]: Small Upper Cover ( x1). Open the front door, remove the screw, then remove the cover.
PAGE 903
BASIC PROCEDURES August 2006 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE [A] [B] B700R114.WMF 1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.1.1) 2. To lower the upper tray: • Support the tray [A] with your right hand. • Pull gear [B] toward you to release. • Slowly lower the tray until it stops.
PAGE 904
August 2006 BASIC PROCEDURES [A] [D] [B] [E] [C] B700R115.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Front Side Cover ( x1) Rear Side Cover ( x1) Upper Tray ( x1) Tray Bracket ( x4, x1 shoulder screw ) [E]: End Fence ( x3) B700R116.
PAGE 905
UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH August 2006 1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH [A] B700R117.WMF [C] [B] B700R118.WMF Remove: • Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1) • End fence ( 1.1.
PAGE 906
August 2006 POSITIONING ROLLER 1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER [A] [C] [B] B700R103.WMF Peripherals [A]: Open the front door. [B]: Pull out the stapler unit.
PAGE 907
PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR [A] [B] B700R107.WMF • Remove small upper cover ( 1.1.
PAGE 908
August 2006 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 1.5 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 [A] [B] [C] B700R108.WMF Peripherals • Remove small upper cover, upper cover ( 1.1.
PAGE 909
EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR Remove: • Rear cover ( 1.1.1) • Upper covers ( 1.1.1) • Front door ( 1.1.1) • Cover ( 1.1.1) • Paper exit cover ( 1.1.1) [A] [A]: Inner cover ( x2) B700R109.WMF [C] [B]: Exit guide plate • x1 • Link and spring • x1 • x1 [C]: Upper tray exit sensor (S6) ( x1) [B] B700R110.
PAGE 910
August 2006 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR [C] [B] [A] B700R111.WMF Peripherals • Remove the exit guide plate. ( 1.6) [A]: Guide plate.
PAGE 911
FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR August 2006 1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR [B] [A] B700R133.WMF • Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. • Disconnect the cover interposer if it is installed.
PAGE 912
August 2006 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR [A] [B] B700R102.WMF Peripherals • Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
PAGE 913
FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR • Open the front door. • Pull out the stapler tray. [A]: Fold unit vertical guide plate [A] B700R121.WMF [B]: Fold unit inner cover ( x2, Spring pin x1) [B] B700R125.WMF [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: Fold unit upper cover ( x1) Paper clamp mechanism ( x4) Fold unit exit sensor bracket ( x1) Fold unit exit sensor (S31) ( x1) [C] [D] [E] [F] B700-12 B700R126.
PAGE 914
August 2006 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) 1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) 1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT [D] [A] [C] [B] [E] B700R802.WMF Important • The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even. 1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode. 2. Europe, Asia: Use SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Use SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
PAGE 915
FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) August 2006 [A] [B] B700R901.WMF 10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door. 11. Do a folding test. • Switch the copier on. • Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF. • On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling. • Press [Start]. One sheet is folded. 12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray. 13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way that it came out of the finisher). 14.
PAGE 916
August 2006 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) [E] [A] [D] [C] [B] B700R130A.WMF 15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [A] out. 16. Open the guide plate [B]. 17. Turn the adjustment screw [C] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test sheet. • For + skew ([A] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw (clockwise). • For – skew ([B] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw to the left (counter-clockwise).
PAGE 917
FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) August 2006 1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT Important • The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even. 1. Switch the copier on. 2. Do a folding test. • Switch the copier on. • Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF. • On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling. • Press [Start]. One sheet is folded. 3.
PAGE 918
August 2006 CORNER STAPLER 1.12 CORNER STAPLER [C] [B] [A] B700R112.WMF B700R113.WMF Peripherals • Open the front door.
PAGE 919
FOLD UNIT August 2006 1.13 FOLD UNIT [C] B700R119.WMF [A] [B] B700R801.WMF • Remove the back cover ( 1.1.1) • Open the front door. CAUTION: The stapler unit is heavy.
PAGE 920
August 2006 FOLD UNIT [A] [B] B700R124.WMF [C] B700R134.WMF Important: Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling. CAUTION: The fold unit is heavy. 1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [B] attached to the back of the new fold unit. 2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [C] of the finisher. 3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match settings printed on the seal attached to the fold unit.
PAGE 921
FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR August 2006 1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR [A] [B] B700R132.WMF • Pull out the stapler unit.
PAGE 922
August 2006 STACK PRESENT SENSOR 1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR [E] [D] [A] B700R121.WMF [C] [B] Important: If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( 1.11.1, 1.11.2) • Remove the stapler unit ( 1.13) [A]: Guide plate. [B]: Stay ( x4) [C]: Left plate ( x4) [D]: Sensor bracket ( x1) [E]: Stack present sensor (S32) ( x1) B700-21 Peripherals B700R122.
PAGE 923
BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR August 2006 1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER [B] [C] [A] B700R903.WMF • Open the front door. • Pull out the stapler unit.
PAGE 924
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR • Open the front door. • Remove the stapler unit. ( 1.13) 1. Remove: [A]: Stay ( x4). [B]: Left plate ( x4). [B] [A] B700R122A.WMF [F] 2. Remove: [C]: Harness cover ( x2) [D]: Booklet stapler support stay ( x4, x2, x4) [E]: Booklet stapler ( x4) [F]: Booklet stapler motor ( x2, x1) [D] To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor 3. Reattach the booklet stapler motor. Important: Do not tighten the screws.
PAGE 925
GENERAL LAYOUT August 2006 2. DETAILS 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT 1 12 2 11 10 3 9 4 8 5 6 7 B700D101.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. *1 Proof Tray Junction Gate Punch Unit Stapler Junction Gate Pre-Stack Junction Gate Pre-Stack Tray Corner Stapler (M20) 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*1 8. Folder Rollers*1 9. Folder Plate*1 10. Booklet Stapler*1 11. Upper Tray (Shift) 12.
PAGE 926
August 2006 GENERAL LAYOUT Paper direction The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters the finisher: Proof Junction Gate Closed Open Closed Stapler Junction Gate Closed Closed Open Paper Feeds Paper feeds straight through Paper feeds to the proof tray Paper feds to the staple tray Proof tray Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job.
PAGE 927
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 1 3 2 4 5 6 18 7 17 16 15 8 14 9 13 10 12 11 B700D201.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL2) Upper Transport Motor (M2) Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7) Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10) Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11) Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1) Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9) (NonStaple Mode) Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12) 10. 11. 12. 13.
PAGE 928
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 1 3 2 4 15 5 14 13 6 12 7 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) Lower Transport Motor (M3) Entrance Motor (M1) Front Door Safety Switch (SW1) Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2) Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4) Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3) 9 B700D202.WMF 8 8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14) 9. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)* 10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)* 11. Main Board (PCB1) 12.
PAGE 929
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 2 4 3 5 6 7 1 8 10 9 B700D203A.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) Punch Drive Motor (M24) Punch HP Sensor (S24) Punch Unit Board (PCB3) Paper position sensor slide motor (M7) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
PAGE 930
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701 2 1 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 9 10 14 11 1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 12 1 2. 3. 4. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) Feed Out Belt Motor (M5) 5. Booklet Stapler – Rear (M23)* 6. 7. 8. Booklet Stapler – Front (M22)* Jogger Fence Motor (M15) Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) *1 B700 Only 1 1 1 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. B700D204.
PAGE 931
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT 2 1 3 B700 only 4 10 9 8 5 7 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) Fold Roller Motor (M12) Fold Plate Motor (M11) Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29) Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B700-30 B700D205.
PAGE 932
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B700/B701 finishers. NOTE: In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a component that is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700 only. No. Component Boards (PCB) PCB1 PCB2 PCB3 Function Main Board Booklet Stapler Board Punch Unit Board The main board that controls the finisher A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PAGE 933
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 No.
PAGE 934
August 2006 Component S7 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor S8 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (Staple Mode) S9 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (NonStaple Mode) S10 Proof Tray Exit Sensor S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor S12 Upper Tray Limit Sensor S13 Stacking Roller HP Sensor S14 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S15 Jogger Fence HP Sensor S16 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor S17 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Function paper output slot this sensor signals an error when it detects (1) paper has failed to leave th
PAGE 935
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No.
PAGE 936
August 2006 No. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Component S32 Stack Present Sensor S33 Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear S34 Lower Tray Full Sensor Front Function finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers, detects the leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that it feeds out correctly. This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the turn junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a stack is present, this triggers a jam alert.
PAGE 937
DRIVE LAYOUT August 2006 2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 2 3 9 4 8 5 7 6 B700D206.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Upper Transport Motor (M2) Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5) 1 Fold Roller Motor* (M12) *1 B700 Only 6. 7. 8. 9.
PAGE 938
August 2006 JUNCTION GATES 2.4 JUNCTION GATES The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher. [B] Proof Mode [A]: Proof tray junction gate opens. [B]: Staple tray junction gate remains closed. The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above. [A] B700D301.WMF Shift Mode [A]: Proof tray junction gate remains closed. [B]: Staple tray junction gate remains closed.
PAGE 939
PRE-STACKING August 2006 2.5 PRE-STACKING [3] [7] [5] [8] [4] [1] [6] [2] [A] [B] [C] [D] B700D992.WMF This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that contain three pages. [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
PAGE 940
August 2006 PRE-STACKING [9] [11] [10] [E] [F] [12] [G] [H] B700D993.WMF [E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack and wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive. [F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed. [G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray. [H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling. Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
PAGE 941
UPPER TRAY August 2006 2.6 UPPER TRAY [B] [C] [D] [A] [E] [F] [G] [H] B700D108.
PAGE 942
August 2006 UPPER TRAY Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A]. Upper Tray Raising and Lowering Operation Mode Standby (Non-Staple Mode) Sensors, Switch [C] [D] OFF OFF [F] ON Shift ON ON [G] Stops the lift motor is at the standby position when the actuator of the upper feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is between sensors [C] and [D]). Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used as backup if sensor [C] fails or if the upper tray is not attached.
PAGE 943
LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) August 2006 2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) Ready Full 1 Full 2 Full 3 [D] [A] [C] [B] B700D358.WMF The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets down. The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D] detect when the lower tray is full of booklets.
PAGE 944
August 2006 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one stapled and folded booklet. In the table below, the conditions ( Ready Full 1, Full 2 Full 3: See the illustration on the previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page.
PAGE 945
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8 CORNER STAPLING 2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING [B] [A] [D] [C] [E] [F] B700D102.
PAGE 946
August 2006 CORNER STAPLING At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size). Peripherals When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray: • The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of the sides of the selected paper size.
PAGE 947
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT [B] [A] [C] B700D103.
PAGE 948
August 2006 CORNER STAPLING The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes: • Front 1 staple • Rear 1 staple • Rear diagonal staple • Rear/Front 2 staples. The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its stainless steel rail. The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling at the rear. • The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby stapling position.
PAGE 949
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING [B] [A] [C] B468D015.WMF [E] [D] B700D304.WMF Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires the stapler [C]. The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position. The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
PAGE 950
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM [A] [B] [C] B700D305.WMF As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed out belt moves. In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished.
PAGE 951
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING Overview 1 2 24 3 4 23 5 22 6 21 7 8 9 20 10 11 19 12 18 13 17 16 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 15 Leading Edge Pressure Roller Stack Present Sensor (S32) Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23) Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) Feed Out Belt Pawl 2 Positioning Roller Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear) Jogger Fences x2 Pre-Stack Exit Roller Pressure Plate Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 14 13. 14. 15.
PAGE 952
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 1 3 2 [1] [8] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] [7] B700D912.BMP 1 The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. 2 The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet.
PAGE 953
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) [ 2 4 August 2006 5 6 [7] [3] [8] [4] [9] [12] [14] [1] [5] [6] [10] [11] [13] B700D913.BMP 4 The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops. The leading edge pressure roller descends and applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack junction gate [3] (normally open) closes.
PAGE 954
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 7 8 9 [4] [5] [2] [3] [1] B700D914.BMP 7 The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2]. 8 The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4]. With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.
PAGE 955
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 10 August 2006 11 12 [1] [6] [4] [2] [5] [7] [3] B700D915.BMP 10 When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers. 11 The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the fold [5] remains at the nip.
PAGE 956
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 13 14 15 5 3 4 2 1 7 6 B700D916.BMP 13 With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position. 14 The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray.
PAGE 957
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms [G] [F] [E] [B] [D] [A] [C] B700D104.WMF Booklet Stapler [A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position. [B]: Booklet Stapler – Rear [C]: Booklet Stapler – Front Stack Junction Gate [D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam. [E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate. [F]: Stack Junction Gate.
PAGE 958
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) [B] [A] [D] [E] [H] [G] [C] B700D105.WMF Clamp Roller [A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller as well as the fold rollers (see next page). [B]: Clamp Rollers. Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed. Clamp Roller – Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C]. [C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor.
PAGE 959
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 [C] [D] [E] [F] [B] [G] [A] B700D106.WMF Fold Plate B700D107.WMF [A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers. [B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate. [C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position). [D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor.
PAGE 960
August 2006 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10.1 FEED OUT [D] [E] [G] [A] [F] [C] [B] B700D109.WMF [H] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]: [G]: [H]: Feed Out Belt Motor Stack Feed-Out Belt Pawl Exit Rollers Exit Guide Plate Motor Exit Guide Plate Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Upper Tray B700-59 Peripherals B700D110.
PAGE 961
UPPER TRAY OUTPUT August 2006 After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B]. The a pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed out slot. The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from the exit roller. Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
PAGE 962
August 2006 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING [E] [F] [A] [B] [C] [D] B700D359.WMF Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C]. Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E]. Peripherals The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
PAGE 963
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) 2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION [A] [B] [C] B700D351.WMF Skew Correction Before Punching This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time. Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the sheet.
PAGE 964
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) [E] [B] [F] [D] [C] [G] [A] B700D352.WMF Punch Unit Position Correction These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment. The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A]. The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the paper.
PAGE 965
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 SP6102 SP6101 B700D360.WMF These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment: • SP6101 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed. • SP6102 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".
PAGE 966
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) 2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection [F] [D] [E] [A] [C] [B] B700D353.WMF Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) Finisher Entrance Roller Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1) Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7) Paper Position Sensor (S27) Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from the copier into the finisher.
PAGE 967
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 Punch Unit Movement [C] [B] [A] B700D354.WMF [A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9) [B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21) [C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the correct position for punching. The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.
PAGE 968
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) [C] Punch Selection and Firing [A] [B] [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) Punch Encoder Wheel Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) Punch HP Sensor (S23) [D] 1 The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap in the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is used to control the punch timing. 2 [E] B700D355.WMF The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F].
PAGE 969
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM [A] [B] [D] [C] B700D357.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) Punch Waste Belt Punch Waste Hopper Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt [B]. The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
PAGE 970
August 2006 FINISHER JAM DETECTION 2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION R1 to R4 R8 to R12 R5 to R7 Display Mode R1 to R3 Proof Shift Staple R3 Proof Jam Finisher entrance sensor late Finisher entrance sensor lag Proof exit sensor late Proof exit sensor lag Upper tray exit sensor late R4 Shift Upper tray exit sensor lag What It Means After main machine exit sensor goes OFF, finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 450 mm.
PAGE 971
FINISHER JAM DETECTION Display Mode R5 to R7 Staple R8 to R12 Booklet Staple (B700 Only) Jam Pre-stack tray exit sensor lag Pre-stack tray exit sensor late Fold unit entrance sensor late (S26) Fold unit exit sensor late (S31) Fold unit exit sensor lag (S31) August 2006 What It Means After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, prestack tray exit sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 650 mm.
PAGE 972
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (Machine Code: B704) 06/09
PAGE 973
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B704-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 EXTERNAL COVERS......................................................................... B704-1 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................. B704-2 FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B704-3 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... B704-4 MAIN BOARD .........
PAGE 974
September 2006 EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS [E] [A] [D] [C] [F] [B] B470R001.WMF Peripherals [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Upper front cover ( x 2) NOTE: To remove the upper front cover, screw [C] must be removed.
PAGE 975
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER September 2006 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER [A] [B] B470R002.WMF B470R003.WMF Open the feed cover. [A]: Feed unit • The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out.
PAGE 976
September 2006 FEED BELT 1.3 FEED BELT [E] [A] [D] [B] [C] B470R004.WMF [F] Feed unit ( 1.2) [A]: Pick-up roller unit. • Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow. [B]: Feed belt holder • Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the holder. • Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs. [C]: Feed belt. Re-assembly 1. Position the pick-up roller unit [A] and feed belt holder [B] as shown above. 2.
PAGE 977
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT September 2006 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT [A] [B] [C] B470R151.WMF Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets. 1. Open the feed cover. 2. Loosen the screw [A]. 3. Push the table [B] left or right to change its position, then tighten the screw. NOTE: If you want to see the scale [C], you must remove the rear cover and the support tray.
PAGE 978
September 2006 MAIN BOARD 1.5 MAIN BOARD [A] B470R101.WMF Open the top cover. Rear cover ( x 1) [A]: Main board ( x 9, x 4) Peripherals NOTE: All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be set to OFF.
PAGE 979
MOTOR REPLACEMENT September 2006 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR [A] [B] B470R102.WMF Open the top cover. Rear middle cover ( x 1) ( 1.1) [A]: Motor bracket ( x 1, harness x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1) [B]: Motor ( x 2) 1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR [A] B470R104.WMF Rear upper cover ( 1.
PAGE 980
September 2006 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR [A] [C] [D] [B] B470R105.WMF [E] B470R103.WMF [A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: Feed gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1) Transport gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1) Motor bracket (harness x 5, x 4) Feed motor ( x 1, x 2) Transport motor ( x 1, x 2) B704-7 06/09 Peripherals Rear upper cover ( 1.
PAGE 981
OVERVIEW September 2006 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT 1 2 3 5 4 6 B470D001.WMF 1. Support tray 2. Slip sheet tray 3. Pick-up roller 4. Feed belt 5. Separation roller 6.
PAGE 982
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 B470D003.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor 5. Transport Motor 6. Timing Belt 7. Vertical Transport Motor B704-9 06/09 Peripherals 4.
PAGE 983
OVERVIEW September 2006 2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION The width sensors [A] (S1, S2, S3) and length sensors [B] (S4, S5, S6) detect the width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray. DLT SEF A3 SEF 8 K SEF B4 SEF LG F4 S6 A4 SEF S5 S4 10"x14" LT SEF US EXE SEF 16 K SEF B5 SEF 8"x10" HLT SEF A5 SEF LT LEF 16 K LEF B5 LEF US EXE LEF A5 LEF HLT LEF P5 P4 P3 P2 S3 P1 S2 S1 B470D901.
PAGE 984
September 2006 OVERVIEW The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size. A3 B4 A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF 11" x 17" 10" x 14" SEF 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 11" 11" x 81/2" 8" x 10" 51/2" x 81/2" 81/2" x 51/2" 71/2" x 101/2" (US Exec.) 101/2" x 71/2" (US Exec.
PAGE 985
OVERVIEW September 2006 B064 series: Paper Size Detection North America Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded for feeding from the cover interposer tray.
PAGE 986
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.4 PAPER PATH 1 2 3 4 5 6 B470D006.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Separation Roller 4. Grip Roller 6. Transport Roller 2 The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into the paper path to the finisher below. B704-13 06/09 Peripherals 5.
PAGE 987
PAPER FEED September 2006 2.2 PAPER FEED [B] [C] [H] [G] [A] [E] [D] [F] B470D005.WMF Power On When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor [C] and switches the motor off.
PAGE 988
3000-SHEET FINISHER (Machine Code: B706) 06/09
PAGE 989
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-1 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................ B706-2 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-3 3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT............................................... B706-3 Front Door...................................................................................... B706-3 Left Inner Cover ....................................................................
PAGE 990
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ...................................... B706-26 3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)........................................................................ B706-27 3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ......................................... B706-27 Front to Rear Adjustment ............................................................. B706-27 Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B706-27 3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513) ..................................
PAGE 991
PAGE 992
September 2006 Installation 1. INSTALLATION Peripherals For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706, please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service manual.
PAGE 993
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE September 2006 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 PM table, please refer to Section “2. Preventive Maintenance” in the main Service Manual.
PAGE 994
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT [A] [D] [B] [C] B478R502.WMF B478R505.WMF 1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1). 2. Remove the front door [B]. Left Inner Cover 1. Remove the front door. 2. Remove the left inner cover [C] ( x 1). Inner Cover 1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).
PAGE 995
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 Side Table and Upper Tray [C] [B] [A] B478R503.WMF 1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it. 2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].
PAGE 996
September 2006 [D] Replacement and Adjustment [E] [B] [A] [J] [G] [H] [I] [F] [C] B478R504.WMF B478R501.WMF Left Covers 1. Remove the left upper panel [A]. 2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2, x 2). 3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See “Front Door and Left Inner Cover Replacement”.) 4. Remove the rear cover [F] ( x 2). Rear Cover and Top Cover 1. Remove the upper tray. (See “Side Table and Upper Tray”.) 2. Remove the step screws [D] ( x 2). 3. Remove the top cover [E] ( x 2).
PAGE 997
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.2 ROLLERS 3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER [A] [B] [C] B478R522.WMF 1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out. 2.
PAGE 998
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER [C] [A] [B] B478R506.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the snap ring [A]. 3. Release the rubber belt [B]. Peripherals 4. Replace the positioning roller [C].
PAGE 999
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER [C] [B] [A] [D] [E] B478R507.WMF [H] [G] [I] [F] B478R508.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8). 4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and release the tension of the timing belt. 5. Remove the pulley [D] and bushing [E] ( x 2). 6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1). 7.
PAGE 1000
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT B478R523.WMF [B] [C] [A] [E] [F] [D] B478R524.WMF 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2). 4. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, clamp x 1). 5. Remove the front guide [C] ( x 1, spring x 1). NOTE: When re-installing, make sure that the flat end of the shaft is against the plate. 6. Remove the front panel [D] from the stays ( x 6). 7.
PAGE 1001
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.4 JOGGER FENCE [B] [A] B478R525.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Push both fences to the center. 4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1) 5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1). NOTE: If the screws are difficult to remove or re-attach, remove the jogger fence belt and spring plate.
PAGE 1002
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5 SENSORS 3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR [C] [E] [F] [D] [G] [B] [A] B478R509.WMF Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 1. Remove the top cover. ( 3.71) 3. Remove the protector plate [A] ( x 1). 4. Remove the sensor feeler [B] ( x 1). 5. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1). 6. Replace the stack height sensor 1 [D] ( x 1) or 2 [E] ( x 1). Exit Guide Open Sensor 1. Remove the sensor bracket [F] ( x 1). 2.
PAGE 1003
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR [D] [C] [B] [E] [A] B478R510.WMF Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2). 3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1). 4. Replace the upper tray paper limit sensor [C] ( x 1). Upper Tray Exit Sensor 5. Remove the sensor bracket [D] ( x 1). 6. Replace the upper tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1).
PAGE 1004
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR [B] [C] [A] [D] [A] B478R511.WMF [E] Peripherals B478R512.WMF 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the inner cover. 4. Release the upper exit guide springs [A] (x 2). 5. Disconnect the link [B] from the cam ( x 1). 6. Remove the upper exit guide [C] ( x 1, x 1). 7. Remove the guide stay [D] ( x 2). 8. Replace the shift tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1) ( x 1).
PAGE 1005
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS [B] [A] B478R513.WMF [D] [C] B478R514.WMF Entrance Sensor 1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier. 2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). 3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) ( x 1). Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1). 3. Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor [D] ( x 1)( x 1).
PAGE 1006
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR [A] [B] B478R521.WMF [C] B478R515.WMF [E] B478R516.WMF 1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the main board [A] ( x 8, x all). 3. Release the guide [B] ( x 2). 4. Open the front door. 5. Remove the left vertical transport guide [C]. 6. Remove the middle vertical transport guide [D] ( x 1). 7. Replace the pre-stack paper sensor [E] ( x 1).
PAGE 1007
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR [A] [B] [C] B478R517.WMF 1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the rear cover ( x 2). 3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1). 4. Remove the hopper holder [B] ( x 2). 5. Replace the staple waste hopper sensor [C] ( x 1).
PAGE 1008
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS [C] [A] [B] B478R519.WMF 1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.) 2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] ( x 4) (Springs x 2). 3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1). Peripherals 4. Replace the stapler return sensor [C] ( x 1).
PAGE 1009
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.6 STAPLER [C] [B] [A] B478R518.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray. 2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A]. 3. Remove the stapler cover [B] ( x 1, x 2). 4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs.
PAGE 1010
September 2006 3.7 Replacement and Adjustment SHIFT TRAY MOTOR [A] B478R531.WMF 1. Remove the front door and rear cover ( 3.1). Peripherals 2.
PAGE 1011
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.7.1 STACKING ROLLE / ROLLER DRAG MOTORS, RETURN HP SENSOR [B] [A] [C] B478R526.WMF 1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]). NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift tray must be down. 2. Remove the tray shift motor. ( 3.7) 3. Remove the left stay [A] ( x 3) 4. Unhook the stay at top [B]. 5.
PAGE 1012
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment [E] [F] [A] [D] [C] [B] B478R527.WMF [G] [H] 6. Remove the end fence [A] and plate [B] ( x 2). 7. Disengage the end fence races [C] from the rollers [D] behind the fence. 8. Remove the upper stay [E] ( x 4). 9. Remove the lower stay [F] ( x 4). 10. Remove the cover [G] ( x 4). 11. Remove the stacking roller/drag motor stay [H] ( x 3, x4). NOTE: Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before removing.
PAGE 1013
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 [A] [B] B478R530.WMF [D] [C] [E] B478R529.WMF 12. Remove the stacking motor bracket [A] (bushing x 1, x 1). 13. Remove the stacking motor [B] ( x 2). 14. Remove the roller drag motor bracket [C] ( x 2). 15. Remove return HP sensor [D]. 16. Remove the roller drag motor [E] ( x 1).
PAGE 1014
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT 3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER [B] [A] B706R101.WMF B706R101.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the stapler tray unit [A]. Peripherals 3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover [B] ( x 2).
PAGE 1015
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT [A] B706R103.WMF B706R103.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit. 2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2). 3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit [A] ( x 4, x 4, x 2).
PAGE 1016
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR [A] [B] B706R102.WMF B706R102.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit. 2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2). 3. Remove the motor bracket [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1). Peripherals 4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
PAGE 1017
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR [A] B706R104.WMF B706R104.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit. 2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1, x 1, x 1).
PAGE 1018
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531) 3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT [A] B531R101.WMF The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.
PAGE 1019
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513) 3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT [A] B513I002.WMF [B] B513R003.WMF 4. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] ( x 2). 5. Remove the jogger unit [B] ( x 2, x 1).
PAGE 1020
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB [A] B513R001.WMF 1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 3.10.1) Peripherals 2.
PAGE 1021
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR [A] [B] B513R002.WMF 1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 3.10.1) 2. Remove the shift jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1). 3. Remove the shift jogger lift motor [B] ( x 2, x 1).
PAGE 1022
September 2006 Troubleshooting 4. TROUBLESHOOTING Peripherals If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see “Section 4 Troubleshooting” of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem.
PAGE 1023
SERVICE TABLES September 2006 5. SERVICE TABLES For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 SP codes, please refer to “5. Service Tables” in the main machine service manual. 5.1 DIP SWITCHES 1 0 0 0 DPS100 2 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 1 Description Default Free run: A4 LEF, staple mode Free run: staple and tray shift NOTE: Do not use any other settings. 5.2 TEST POINTS No. TP100 TP101 TP102 TP103 Label (5V) (GND) (RXD) (TXD) Monitored Signal +5 V Ground RXD TXD 5.3 FUSES No.
PAGE 1024
September 2006 Details 6. DETAILS 6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE Upper Tray Mode [A] [D] [C] [B] B478D506.WMF Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode [A] [A] [D] [C] [C] [B] B478D505.WMF [B] B478D507.WMF Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
PAGE 1025
DETAILS September 2006 6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING [A] [B] [E] [F] [C] [D] B478D000.WMF This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF). During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.
PAGE 1026
September 2006 Details 6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING [C] [G] [A] [F] [E] [B] [D] [L] [M] [I] [K] [J] B478D508.WMF In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of the stack is aligned correctly for stapling. Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F] turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.
PAGE 1027
DETAILS September 2006 6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT [A] [B] [C] B478D513.WMF Side-to-Side The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position. If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at the front.
PAGE 1028
September 2006 Details [A] [B] [F] [D] B478D514.WMF [E] B478D523.WMF B478D515.WMF [C] In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the stapler units [B] 45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position. Rotation (2) When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
PAGE 1029
DETAILS September 2006 6.5 STAPLER [C] [E] [B] [D] [A] B478D521.WMF B478D516.WMF [E] [F] B478D522.WMF [G] When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling. During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering the cutter [C]. This excess length depends on the number of copies in the set; there will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets.
PAGE 1030
September 2006 Details [C] [D] [A] [B] [E] B478D518.WMF [F] B478D517.WMF When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop. The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect.
PAGE 1031
DETAILS September 2006 6.6 FEED-OUT [G] [D] [A] [B] [C] B478D519.WMF [I] [H] [E] [F] B478D512.WMF After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly.
PAGE 1032
September 2006 Details 6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING [A] [B] [E] [C] [F] [D] [H] [G] [I] B478D524.WMF The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C]. The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt. The stacking roller drag motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of the plate to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the shift tray.
PAGE 1033
DETAILS September 2006 6.8 SHIFT TRAY 6.8.1 OVERVIEW [E] [D] [F] [G] [A] [B] [C] B478D010.WMF The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through gears and timing belts [C]. Stand-by Mode After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on.
PAGE 1034
September 2006 Details 6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT [D] [B] [C] [H] [A] [G] [F] [E] B478D010.WMF Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) In sort/stack mode, if S12 fails when the tray is being lifted, the shift tray upper limit switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged. Staple Mode The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [B] is between the staple mode home position sensors [C] and [D].
PAGE 1035
DETAILS September 2006 6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION [A] [D] [B] [C] B478D010.WMF This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9) for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper (smaller than B4). NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used. When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500 sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
PAGE 1036
September 2006 Details 6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT [D] [A] [F] [C] [E] B478D520.WMF In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of copies. When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F] and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered.
PAGE 1037
DETAILS September 2006 6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER B706D004.WMF B706D004.WMF B706D005.WMF Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling Z-folded sheets: 1. The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the Z-folded sheets. 2. The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position. 3. A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray. 4. The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray. 5. Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge. 6.
PAGE 1038
September 2006 Details 6.11 JAM CONDITIONS 1. The entrance sensor does not turn on when the copier has fed paper 426 mm after the copier exit sensor turned off. 2. The entrance sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned on. 3. The upper tray exit sensor does not turn on when the upper transport motor has fed paper 574 mm after the entrance sensor turned on. 4.
PAGE 1039
DETAILS September 2006 6.12 PUNCH UNIT (B531) 6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE [C] [A] [B] [D] [E] B531D102.WMF The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel. The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor.
PAGE 1040
September 2006 Details 6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION [A] [B] [C] B531D103.WMF Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch unit. When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied. The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor.
PAGE 1041
DETAILS September 2006 6.13 JOGGER UNIT (B513) 6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT 2 1 3 4 7 6 5 B513D003.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
PAGE 1042
September 2006 Details 6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE [C] [F] [B] [A] [D] [G] [H] [J] [I] [E] B513D002.WMF At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges.
PAGE 1043
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION September 2006 7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 7 20 8 22 9 19 18 10 17 11 16 12 15 23 13 14 6V900.WMF B478V500.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
PAGE 1044
September 2006 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7.
PAGE 1045
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Symbol Name S03 Upper Tray Limit S04 S05 Shift Tray Exit Exit Guide Open S06 Staple Mode HP 1 S07 Staple Mode HP 2 S10 S11 Shift Lower Limit – Large Paper Shift Tray Lower Limit 2 Shift Tray Lower Limit 3 S12 Shift Mode HP S13 Stacking Roller HP S14 Shift Tray Half-Turn S15 Pre-Stack Tray Paper S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 Stapler Tray Exit Positioning Roller HP Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Stapler Tray Paper Jogger HP Stack Plate - Center HP Stack Plate – Front
PAGE 1046
September 2006 Symbol S34 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Name Bottom Fence HP Symbol Name SOLENOIDS (Upper) Tray Junction SOL1 Gate SOL2 Stapler Junction Gate SOL3 Pre-Stack Junction Gate SOL4 Pre-stack Paper Stopper SOL5 Stapler Return Function Detects the bottom fence home position for Z-fold paper staple mode. Function Drives the tray junction gate. Drives the stapler junction gate. Drives the pre-stack junction gate. Drives the stopper pawl of the pre-stacking tray.
PAGE 1047
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION September 2006 7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 2 3 4 5 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 6 7 20 21 11 22 23 10 B478V503.WMF 9 8 26 24 25 B478V504.WMF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
PAGE 1048
9-BIN MAILBOX (Machine Code: B762) 06/09
PAGE 1049
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B762-1 1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS ....................................................................... B762-1 1.2 SENSORS .......................................................................................... B762-2 1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD............................................ B762-3 2. DETAILS............................................................................... B762-4 2.1 OVERVIEW ..................
PAGE 1050
PAGE 1051
September 2006 COVERS AND TRAYS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and procedure in this section. 1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS [D] [C] [A] [B] [A]: Trays • Grip each tray by the front and lift out. [B]: Front cover ( x2) [C]: Rear cover ( x3) [D]: Top cover B762-1 06/09 Peripherals B471R001.
PAGE 1052
SENSORS September 2006 1.2 SENSORS [A] [D] B471R003.WMF [B] [C] B471R104.WMF Remove the tray ( 1.1) [A]: Bin cover [B]: Tray sensor ( x1) [C]: Tray overflow sensor ( x1) [D]: Vertical transport sensor ( x1) • Raise the pawl, then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove.
PAGE 1053
September 2006 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD 1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD [C] [B] [D] [A] Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]: Control board ( x3, x17) [B]: Main motor bracket (main motor x1, x2) [C]: Timing belt [D]: Main motor ( x1) B762-3 06/09 Peripherals B471R002.
PAGE 1054
OVERVIEW September 2006 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 4 B471D003.WMF 1. Bins (x9) 2. Vertical Transport Rollers (x5) 3. Turn Gates (x8) 4. Exit Rollers (x9) The trays are 1 to 9 (bottom to top). The numbers are clearly marked on the side of the unit. The top tray does not require a turn gate. When the top tray is selected for output, all turn gates remain closed, leaving only the top bin open.
PAGE 1055
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT 2 1 3 B471D002.WMF 1. Main Motor 2. Main Timing Belt Peripherals 3.
PAGE 1056
OVERVIEW September 2006 2.1.3 PAPER PATH 5 4 6 7 1 2 3 B471D970.WMF 1. Original Paper Path 2. Vertical Transport Path 3. LCT Feed 4. Selected Trays 5. Turn Gates 6. Mailbox Paper Path 7. Junction Gate (paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher’s proof tray) The solenoid for the junction gate (7) is part of the mailbox.
PAGE 1057
September 2006 BASIC OPERATION 2.2 BASIC OPERATION 2.2.1 PAPER PATH [C] [B] [A] [D] B471D004.WMF [E] The unit is mounted on top the finisher and connected to the finisher by a 14-pin connector. When the leading edge of the paper passes and activates the entrance sensor of the finisher, the mailbox main motor switches on and the mailbox vertical transport rollers [A] begin to turn. The exit roller [B] feeds the paper out to the selected tray [C].
PAGE 1058
OVERFLOW DETECTION September 2006 2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION 2.3.1 OVERVIEW [A] [B] B471D005.WMF An overflow sensor [A] and actuator [B] are above the exit of each paper tray. The actuator, mounted on a swivel arm, remains in contact with the top of the stack. The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor. Then, a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts. If the paper is removed before the tray is full, the job continues.
PAGE 1059
September 2006 OVERFLOW DETECTION 2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING Between Sheets Full (High) Not Full (Low) Paper Length Paper Length Full Paper Length B471D010.WMF When the mailbox exit sensor goes high for the prescribed time (T), the machine determines that the tray is full. The value of T is calculated, regardless of paper size, as follows: T (s) = (60/s x max.
PAGE 1060
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING September 2006 2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING 2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) Î 1ST BIN TRAY Main Motor (Main Unit) J1 Exit Sensor *1 Main Motor (Mailbox) Turn Gate (SOL 1) *1: Time required for A4 LEF B471D011.WMF 2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) Î 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY Main Motor (Main Unit) J1 Exit Sensor *1 Main Motor (Mailbox) Turn Gate (SOL 2) J2 Vertical Transport Sensor J3 *1 *1: Time required for A4 Sideways (LEF) *2: Feed to 9th Tray: All SOLs OFF. B471D012.
PAGE 1061
September 2006 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING J1 Timing: After the leading edge of the sheet activates the mailbox exit sensor, a misfeed is detected if the sensor does not switch off within: X+0.5 s Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass the sensor. (X = 1.
PAGE 1062
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING September 2006 B762-12 06/09
PAGE 1063
August, 2006 MainFrame SPECIFICATIONS 1. MAINFRAME 1.1 COPYING Configuration Dimensions (w x d x h) (no ARDF) Weight (with ARDF) Original Scanning Copy Process Development Fusing Engine speed Duplex Copy Speed (single-sided to double-sided) Duplex Copy Speed (double-sided to double-sided) Warm-up time First copy Original types Max. original size Resolution Max. image size Magnification Zoom Paper capacity (80 g/m2 or 20 lb.
PAGE 1064
MainFrame August, 2006 EU, Asia Paper Sizes Paper weight Output capacity Power Max. power consumption Counter Counterfeit prevention A3, B4 SEF A4, B5, A5, B6 SEF/LEF 8½" x 13", 8K SEF 16K SEF For more, see "Paper Sizes" 52.3 – 127.9 g/m2 Tray 1 (Tandem tray) 14 – 34 lb. bond 52.3 – 127.9 g/m2 Tray 2 (Universal tray) 14 – 34 lb. bond 52.3 – 127.9 g/m2 Tray 3 (Universal tyar) 14 – 34 lb. bond (up to 163 g/m2, 44 lb. index/ 60 lb.) 52.3 – 256 g/m2 Bypass 14 – 68.5 lb. bond Duplex mode 64 – 127.
PAGE 1065
August, 2006 MainFrame Paper Sizes OP_T EU Asia OP_T 2nd & 3rd Tray 550 sheet each NA EU Asia A_AD A_AA OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AA OP_L OP_L #_S #_S A A A_AD A_AD A A #_S #_S OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L OP_L #_S A_WD X X A_AD A_AD A A #_S #_S X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S X X UP UP X X #_S #_S X X UP A_AD X X #_S A_WD X X X X X X #_S #_S X X X X X X X #_S #_S X OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD X X A_WD #_S 8½" x 14” OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L
PAGE 1066
MainFrame August, 2006 1.2 PRINTING CPU RAM HDD PDL Print Resolution (max.) Fonts Connectivity Host interface Network Protocol Intel Celeron LV 733 MHz 1384 MB (shared with copying, scanning) 320 GB (80 GB x 4) RPCS, PCL5c, PCL6 600 x 600 dpi (4-bit) Standard 48 PCL fonts Option With PS3, 136 Adobe PostScript Type 1 fonts Standard Ethernet RJ-45, 10-BaseT, 100BaseTX, USB 2.
PAGE 1067
August, 2006 MainFrame 1.3 SCANNER Optical resolution Scanning speed Max. scan area Auto scan size detection Original size Compression Method Interface support Scan mod Image Density Image Rotation SADF/Batch mode Mixed size originals 1 * 100, 150, 200 (default), 300, 400, 600 dpi Full color: 45 cpm / Black: 60 cpm (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c) 297 x 432 mm (11.
PAGE 1068
ARDF August, 2006 2. ARDF Dimensions (w x d x h) Weight Power consumption Noise Stack capacity Original size Original weight Auto Original Size Detection Original set position Special original setting Feeding speed Power source 680 x 560 x 180 mm (26.8 x 22 x 7.1 in.) Less than 19.5 kg (42.9 lb.
PAGE 1069
August, 2006 Optional Peripherals 3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS 3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473 Installation of the LCT Adapter B699 is necessary for the LCT. Dimension (w x d x h) Stand-alone 314 x 458 x 659 mm (12.4 x 18 x 25.9 in.) Weight With LG/B4 Option Standalone With LG/B4 Option 462 x 458 x 659 mm (18.2 x 18 x 25.9 in.) Less than 20 kg (44 lb.) Less than 27 kg (59.4 lb.) Less than 50 W Less than 74dB A4, B5, 11”x 8½” LEF 52 - 128g/m² 14 lb – 34 lb.
PAGE 1070
Optional Peripherals August, 2006 3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762 The mailbox can be installed on top of the 2000-Sheet Finisher B700, the 3000Sheet Finisher B701, or the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. Dimension (w x d x h) Weight Power Consumption Noise Number of Bins Stack Capacity of each Bin Paper Size Paper Weight 540 x 600 x 660 mm (21.3 x 23.6 x 26 in.) Less than 15 kg (33 lb.) Less than 48 W Less than 74 dB 9 bins 100 sheets* A5. A4, A3 5½" x 8½", 8½" x11”, 8½" x14", 11"x17" 52 - 128g/m² 14 lb. – 34 lb.
PAGE 1071
August, 2006 Optional Peripherals 3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706 This finisher is compatible with other copiers without special items. However, this copier requires installation of the Finisher Adapter B698 on this finisher.
PAGE 1072
Optional Peripherals August, 2006 3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531 This punch unit is for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. The Punch Units B531 and Output Jogger Unit B513 are also available for this B706.
PAGE 1073
August, 2006 Optional Peripherals 3.7 3000-SHEET FINISHER B701 This finisher provides corner stapling only.
PAGE 1074
Optional Peripherals Staple Replenishment Stapled Stack Capacity (same size) Stapled Stack Capacity (mixed sizes) August, 2006 Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge Paper Size Pages/Set 20-50 pages A4 LEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF 2-19 pages 15-50 pages A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12”x11” SEF 2-14 pages 15-30 pages Others 2-14 pages A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4 SEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF & 2-30 pages 11” x17” SEF Spec-12 Sets 150-60 sets 150 sets 100-30 sets 100 sets 100-33 sets 100 sets 50 set
PAGE 1075
August, 2006 Optional Peripherals 3.8 2000-SHEET FINISHER B700 This finisher provides booklet as well as corner stapling. Equipped with two trays, the upper tray holds stapled and shifted copies, and the lower tray holds booklet stapled and folded copies.
PAGE 1076
Optional Peripherals August, 2006 Staple Replenishment Corner staple Booklet staple Corner Staple Capacity Same Size A4 LEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12”x11” SEF Others Mixed Size Booklet Staple Capacity A4 LEF + A3 SEF B5 LEF + B4 SEF 8 1/2”x11” LEF + 11” x17” SEF A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF 8 1/2”x11” SEF, 8 1/2”x14” SEF, 11”x17” SEF 12”x18” SEF 5,000 staples per cartridge 2,000 staples per cartridge 13-50 pages 2-12 pages 10-50 pages 2-9 pages 10-30 pages 2-9 pages 2-30 pages 2-5 pages
PAGE 1077
August, 2006 Optional Peripherals 3.9 PUNCH UNIT B702 This punch unit is designed for use with the 2000-Sheet Stapler B700 (both corner and booklet stapling) and 3000-Sheet Stapler B701 (corner stapling only).
PAGE 1078
Optional Peripherals August, 2006 3.10 A3/11" X 17" TRAY B331 This option is installed in Tray 1 (tandem tray) of the copier so Tray 1 can feed larger paper. Tray 1 normally feeds LT or A4 only. Dimension (w x d x h) Weight Paper Size Paper Capacity 495 x 215 x 535 mm (19.5 x 8.5 x 21.1 in.) 11 kg (24.2 lb.) A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 11”x17” SEF, 8½" x 14” SEF, 8½" x 11” 1,000 Sheets 3.11 COPY TRAY B756 The copy tray is installed receive copies when the copier is used without a finisher.
PAGE 1079
August, 2006 Machine Configuration 4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION 11 10 15 2 9 13 8 5 7 14 12 6 4 1 17 3 16 B132I116.WMF This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier. No.
PAGE 1080
Machine Configuration August, 2006 4.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.1.1 COPIER No.
PAGE 1081
August, 2006 No.
PAGE 1082
Machine Configuration No.
PAGE 1083
August, 2006 No. Component MECHANICAL CLUTCHES MC1 Bypass Feed Clutch MC2 Toner Pump Clutch - M MC3 Toner Supply Clutch - M MC4 Toner Pump Clutch - K MC5 Toner Supply Clutch - K MC6 Toner Pump Clutch - Y MC7 Toner Supply Clutch - Y MC8 Toner Pump Clutch - C MC9 Toner Supply Clutch - C Machine Configuration Function Engages and operates the pick-up roller at the bypass tray. Engages the and drives the Magenta toner pump to pull toner from the Magenta STC.
PAGE 1084
Machine Configuration No.
PAGE 1085
August, 2006 No.
PAGE 1086
Machine Configuration No. Component QUENCHING LAMPS QL1 Quenching Lamp - K QL2 Quenching Lamp - C QL3 Quenching Lamp - M QL4 Quenching Lamp - Y August, 2006 Function Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of the drum in the Black PCU. Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of the drum in the Cyan PCU. Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of the drum in the Magenta PCU.
PAGE 1087
August, 2006 No.
PAGE 1088
Machine Configuration No.
PAGE 1089
August, 2006 No.
PAGE 1090
Machine Configuration No. Component S66 Potential Sensor - Y S67 Temperature Sensor Optics 1 S68 Temperature Sensor Optics 2 S69 S70 S71 S72 S73 S74 Toner End Sensor - M Toner End Sensor - K Toner End Sensor - Y Toner End Sensor - C Scanner HP Sensor Original Width Sensors S75 Original Length Sensors - 1 S76 Original Length Sensor -2 S77 Accordion Jam Sensor S78 Fusing Exit Sensor S79 LCT Relay Sensor No.
PAGE 1091
August, 2006 No.
PAGE 1092
Machine Configuration No. SOL15 Component Bypass Pick up Solenoid No. Component SWITCHES Lower Front Door SW1 Switch SW2 Main Power Switch Upper Front Door SW3 Switches (x5) Paper Size Switch SW4 - Tray 2 Paper Size Switch SW5 - Tray 3 No.
PAGE 1093
August, 2006 Machine Configuration 4.1.2 ARDF No. MOTORS M01 Component Function Feed Motor Drives the feed belt, and the separation, pick-up, and transport as far as the 1st transport roller. Controls the original scanning speed. Feeds paper out of the ARDF and onto the original exit table. Controls the rotation of the upper inverter roller that feeds the original in and out of the upper inverter path.
PAGE 1094
Machine Configuration No. S15 Component Skew Correction Sensor S16 S17 Separation Sensor Exit Sensor S18 Registration Sensor S19 S20 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor Lower inverter sensor S21 ARDF Position Sensor S22 APS Start Sensor SOLENOIDS SOL01 Upper Inverter Solenoid SOL02 Lower Inverter Solenoid August, 2006 Function After pick-up and separation, the skew correction sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
PAGE 1095
August, 2006 APPENDIX • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/4) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (2/4) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (3/4) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (4/4) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/3) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/3) e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (3/3) ADF POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/701) POINT TO POINT DIAGRA
PAGE 1096
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/4)
PAGE 1097
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (2/4)
PAGE 1098
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (3/4)
PAGE 1099
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (4/4)
PAGE 1100
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/3) 18 19 20 21 17 4 3 5 22 23 16 40 41 37 6 2 39 38 42 43 44 24 15 7 1 45 25 26 53 8 27 28 46 52 9 47 29 14 36 11 13* 12 51 30 10 35 34 B132V303A.WMF 31 32 33 50 49 B132V304.WMF 48 54 55 56 57 B132V305.WMF 58 59 60 76 61 62 79 77 78 80 81 82 95 93 91 96 97 98 99 94 100 101 83 102 92 84 103 63 75 104 64 74 114 73 65 85 72 71 70 86 90 69 68 89 67 66 B132V306A.WMF 88 87 B132V310A.
PAGE 1101
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/3) 126 127 128 129 130 131 115 116 156 157 132 117 150 149 148 152 151 134 160 153 161 162 163 135 147 164 183 146 136 125 159 154 133 118 158 155 165 166 182 145 137 124 144 181 167 180 168 119 179 143 120 123 122 142 B132V311.WMF 121 178 138 141 140 139 177 176 175 174 B132V309.WMF 198 173 172 171 170 169 B132V308.
PAGE 1102
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (3/3) Symbol Name Board PCB1 PCB2 PCB3 PCB4 PCB5 PCB6 PCB7 PCB8 PCB9 PCB10 PCB11 PCB12 PCB13 PCB14 PCB15 PCB16 PCB17 PCB18 PCB19 PCB20 PCB21 PCB22 PCB23 PCB24 PCB25 PCB26 PCB27 PCB28 PCB29 PCB30 PCB31 PCB32 PCB33 PCB34 PCB35 PCB36 PCB37 PCB38 PCB39 Solenoid SOL1 SOL2 SOL3 SOL4 SOL5 SOL6 SOL7 SOL8 SOL9 SOL10 SOL11 SOL12 SOL13 SOL14 SOL15 Switch SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 Index No.
PAGE 1103
PAGE 1104
PAGE 1105
PAGE 1106
PAGE 1107
A B C D E F G H I J MAILBOX (B762) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM Paper Overflow Sensor 8 S21 Transport Sensor 5 S20 Paper Detect Sensor 8 S19 Paper Overflow Sensor 7 S18 Paper Detect Sensor 7 4 4 5 6 CN220-3 -2 -1 B [24] [ 24] [0] GND2 [ 5] [5] PCB 1 Main Board CN116 -1 -2 2 1 [24] 24] CN107 -1 -2 [ [24] 24] -3 -4 [ [24] 24] -5 -6 2 1 2 1 GND2 [0] [ 5] [5] -4 -5 -6 3 2 1 CN215-3 -2 -1 4 5 6 6 5 4 -10 -11 -12 [0] GND2 [ 5] [5] GND2 [0] [ 5] [5] -7 -8 -9 CN214-3 -2 -1
PAGE 1108
B A 1 E D C F G I H J COVER INTERPOSER (B 704) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 1 SYMB OL TAB L E DC Line [ ] Voltage CN100-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 CN200-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 [24] [24] GND1 [0] 0/24] A [24 0/24] A [24 0/24] B [24 0/24] B [24 N.C. [0] GND2 [5] [N.C.] RXD ZESM TXD [5] VE 3 A [24 A [24 B [24 B [24 J CN200 Near End Sensor S3 Feed Sensor S4 Bottom Plate H.P.
PAGE 1109
A C B D F E H G L CT (B 473) POINT TO POINT DIA GRAM 1 1 ( ) [ 24] (+) [24] AGND [0] Cover Open [ 5] CGND [0] VAAR [+24] VAAS [+24] Cover Open [ 24] VCC [5] [ 5] CGND [0] Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 5 Paper Height Sensor 3 S6 CN105-12 -11 -10 VCC [5] [ 5] CGND [0] [5]V [ 5] [0] CGND A CN120 SW 1 Tray Cover Switch SW 4 Feed Unit Cover Switch 3 2 1 -3 -2 -1 3 2 1 CN103-11 -10 -9 CN132-1 -2 -3 8 -7 -6 1 2 3 -5 -4 -3 1 2 3 -2 -1 CN131-1 -2 3 2 1 CN128-1 -2 -3
PAGE 1110
A B C D E F G H I J 4 5 6 6 5 4 -7 -8 -9 Shift Paper Height Sensor Stapling Paper Height Sensor S7 CN206-3 -2 -1 7 8 9 3 2 1 -10 -11 -12 [ 24] [0] GND [ 5] [5] +5V +24V SW [24] [0] GND [ 5] [5] +5V +24V SW [24] [ [ 24] COM [24] COM [24] N.C.
PAGE 1111
ADF ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 3 1 Symbol 6 Boards 7 PCB1 8 B132D107.
PAGE 1112
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/2) 2 1 20 3 19 4 21 34 5 35 36 6 18 37 17 7 48 16 22 15 38 33 14 8 39 9 23 10 13 32 24 11 12 40 41 31 30 47 29 28 26 27 B700D201.W MF 42 46 25 44 45 B700D202.W MF B700D204.W MF 49 50 60 59 61 62 63 64 65 51 58 52 66 68 57 53 56 67 55 54 B700D205.W MF 43 B700D203A.
PAGE 1113
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/2) Symbol Name Boards (PCB) PCB1 Main Board PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board PCB3 Punch Unit Board Motors M1 Entrance Motor M2 Upper Transport Motor Lower Transport Motor M3 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor M4 Feed Out Belt Motor M5 M6 Corner Stapler Movement Motor M7 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor M8 Punch Movement Motor M9 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor M10 M11 Fold Plate Motor M12 Fold Roller Motor Corner Stapler Rota
PAGE 1114
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 2 Symbol Name Board 3 PCB1 4 7 Index P to P No. Main Board 2 C3 M1 Front Jog ger Motor 4 F3 M2 Rear Jogger Motor 3 F3 M3 Jogger Lift Motor 1 F4 Motors 12 5 Sensors 6 B703D102.
PAGE 1115
MAILBOX (B762) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT Symbol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 35 8 9 10 11 34 12 33 13 32 14 15 16 31 17 18 30 19 20 29 21 28 Index No.
PAGE 1116
COVER INTERPOSER (B704) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 4 3 2 5 6 Symbol M o to r M1 M2 M3 M4 7 8 9 1 10 Description Index No.
PAGE 1117
LCT (B473) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 4 5 2 6 7 1 8 9 17 10 16 15 14 11 13 12 B473V002.W MF Symbol Motors M1 M2 Description Index No.
PAGE 1118
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 14 12 11 33 13 15 1 S9 32 31 2 30 29 3 16 17 18 19 20 4 28 10 5 27 6 22 21 23 26 25 24 7 9 8 53 54 41 42 40 52 51 34 43 39 38 44 37 36 35 Symbol Sensor S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 50 45 46 47 49 48 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 Motor M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Solenoid Index No.
PAGE 1119
PAGE 1120